summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/44750-0.txt
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to '44750-0.txt')
-rw-r--r--44750-0.txt7289
1 files changed, 7289 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/44750-0.txt b/44750-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..739bb44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/44750-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7289 @@
+*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44750 ***
+
+THE LIBRARY
+OF WORK AND PLAY
+
+ CARPENTRY AND WOODWORK
+ By Edwin W. Foster
+
+ ELECTRICITY AND ITS EVERYDAY USES
+ By John F. Woodhull, Ph.D.
+
+ GARDENING AND FARMING
+ By Ellen Eddy Shaw
+
+ HOME DECORATION
+ By Charles Franklin Warner, Sc.D.
+
+ HOUSEKEEPING
+ By Elizabeth Hale Gilman
+
+ MECHANICS, INDOORS AND OUT
+ By Fred T. Hodgson
+
+ NEEDLECRAFT
+ By Effie Archer Archer
+
+ OUTDOOR SPORTS, AND GAMES
+ By Claude H. Miller, Ph.B.
+
+ OUTDOOR WORK
+ By Mary Rogers Miller
+
+ WORKING IN METALS
+ By Charles Conrad Sleffel
+
+
+[Illustration: HANGING A PICTURE
+
+The wall space is a part of the framing of a picture]
+
+
+
+
+ HOME DECORATION
+ BY
+ PROF. CHARLES F. WARNER, Sc.D.
+
+ _For eight years Master of the Rindge Manual Training
+ School, Mass. Twelve years principal of the Technical
+ High School and Director of the Evening
+ School of Trades, Springfield, Mass._
+
+[Illustration: Title Page]
+
+ GARDEN CITY NEW YORK
+ DOUBLEDAY, PAGE & COMPANY
+ 1916
+
+
+
+ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED, INCLUDING THAT OF TRANSLATION
+ INTO FOREIGN LANGUAGES, INCLUDING THE SCANDINAVIAN
+
+ COPYRIGHT, 1911, BY DOUBLEDAY, PAGE & COMPANY
+
+
+
+
+ TO THE BOYS AND GIRLS OF AMERICA
+ THIS BOOK
+ WHICH RECORDS WHAT SOME OF THEM HAVE DONE
+ IS HOPEFULLY DEDICATED
+
+
+
+
+ Some pure lovers of art discard the formula, _Art for Progress,
+ the Beautiful Useful_, fearing lest the useful should deform the
+ beautiful. They tremble to see the drudge's hand attached to the
+ muse's arm. They are solicitous for the sublime if it descends
+ as far as to humanity. Ah! they are in error. The useful, far
+ from circumscribing the sublime, enlarges it.... Is Aurora less
+ splendid, clad less in purple and emerald--suffers she any
+ diminution of majesty and of radiant grace, because, foreseeing an
+ insect's thirst, she carefully secretes in the flower the dewdrop
+ needed by the bee?
+ Victor Hugo.
+
+
+
+
+ ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
+
+
+This volume is the result of an effort to bring together in close
+relation with fundamental principles of design a variety of practical
+problems which are more or less closely connected with the general
+problem of home decoration and suited to the constructive ability of
+boys and girls from twelve to eighteen years of age. While the book
+is mainly a record of the author's experience and observation in this
+department of educational work, he has received many suggestions from
+co-workers in the same field. It will be impossible to give credit to
+all who have directly or indirectly assisted in the preparation of
+this book: but special acknowledgments are due to Mr. Fred M. Watts,
+who furnished the material for the chapter on Pottery and several
+drawings for other parts of the book; to Miss Grace L. Bell for the
+illustrations and descriptions embodied in the chapter on Block
+Printing; to Mr. Burton A. Adams for the problems in metal work; to Mr.
+Edwin A. Finch and Mr. Lewis O. Richardson who contributed many of the
+specifications for the problems in furniture-making; to Miss Elizabeth
+M. Morton for specific suggestions pertaining to the subject of dress
+as related to the principles of decoration; and to Mrs. Ruth B. S.
+Flower, of Florence, Mass., who supplied several of the photographs and
+much of the descriptive matter for the chapter on Weaving.
+
+Springfield, Mass.
+
+ C. F. W.
+
+
+
+
+ CONTENTS
+
+
+ CHAPTER PAGE
+
+ I. Introductory--The Story of a House 3
+
+ II. Decorations and Furniture 34
+
+ III. Pictures 64
+
+ IV. The Arrangement of Flowers 81
+
+ V. Decorative Fabrics 95
+
+ VI. Dress and the Principles of Decoration 121
+
+ VII. Furniture Making 129
+
+ VIII. Finishing and Re-finishing 212
+
+ IX. Hand Weaving 244
+
+ X. Pottery 280
+
+ XI. Decorative Work in Leather, Copper, and Other
+ Materials 321
+
+ XII. Concluding Suggestions--Country Homes 366
+
+
+
+
+ ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+ Hanging a Picture _Frontispiece_
+
+ FACING PAGE
+
+ All the Rough Carpentry was Assigned to the Boys
+ of the Woodworking Sections of the Vocational
+ School 22
+
+ The Boys of the Forging Classes of the Technical
+ High School were not Overlooked in the Distribution
+ of the Work on the House 24
+
+ A Table Runner of Russian Crash and Pillow
+ Cover with Geometrical Design 96
+
+ Window Draperies with Stencilled Border 108
+
+ Crocheted Panels, a Linen Work Bag with Conventional
+ Landscape in Darning Stitch, a
+ Crash Table Mat Embroidered in Darning and
+ Couching Stitch 118
+
+ Finishing a Library Table 212
+
+ Weaving a Rug 244
+
+ Hand Made Rugs, Hand Made Towels 252
+
+ An Alcove with Window Draperies, Pillow Covers,
+ Window Seat and Moss Green Rug, All Hand
+ Woven 262
+ Hand Woven Window Draperies, Couch Cover,
+ Slumber Rug, and Pillow Covers 266
+
+ Girls at Work on Pottery 280
+
+ Bowls 294
+
+ Vases and Fern Dishes 312
+
+ Tiles 316
+
+ Pottery: Designed and Made by Schoolgirls 318
+
+ Decorative Forgings 364
+
+
+
+
+ HOME DECORATION
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: A model house: Designed by girls and built by boys]
+
+
+
+
+I
+
+INTRODUCTORY
+
+THE STORY OF A HOUSE
+
+
+To design, plan, and build a house is a task that rarely falls to the
+lot of boys and girls. In fact, it is not the common experience of
+men and women to build houses without the aid of architects, masons,
+and carpenters. Such a task, however, was recently offered to certain
+classes in one of the public schools of a well-known New England city.
+It was, indeed, a school problem, and yet there was something about
+it that seemed to suggest larger and more interesting things than
+are ordinarily dealt with in the school-room. It did not seem at all
+like some school work. It was more like real life; for all boys and
+girls must some day have homes of their own, and here was a chance
+to learn how the house, which is an important part of every home, is
+planned and built. It is hardly necessary to say that this work--or
+play, if you like that word better--was undertaken with genuine
+enthusiasm. It was a task crammed full of the pleasure of interest and
+of accomplishment--full of the joy of doing something worth while--from
+the beginning to the end.
+
+_The House a Work of Art._--One of the first lessons learned by these
+young builders--perhaps the most important one of all--was that a
+great many things have to be thought of in planning a house, if the
+thing is to be well done. It is not simply a question of deciding how
+many rooms one will have, arranging them in some conventional order,
+and building the house around them with whatever external features
+style or fancy may dictate. Too many houses, it is true, are planned,
+or at least put up, in this thoughtless fashion; and whatever goes
+into them in decoration or furniture is generally chosen either for
+necessary use or for display--not with any thought of the real comfort
+and satisfaction that come from artistic surroundings. People who are
+satisfied with such dwellings seem to show less appreciation of art,
+the highest product of civilization, than those uncivilized tribes who
+decorated their caves or huts with beautiful rugs of their own weaving
+and who ornamented their pottery and their utensils and implements
+with wonderfully conceived and elaborately wrought designs. Modern
+cave dwellers in apartment houses with all the conveniences of their
+ready-made surroundings, are in danger of missing that self-expression
+in their home belongings that encouraged and delighted even the savage.
+The most extreme example of this form of degeneracy is found in the
+suggestion of a certain great inventor, that the age of concrete
+construction, now at hand, means that we are to have concrete houses
+poured into a standard mould, hardened in twenty-four hours, and
+finished for occupancy in a day or two.
+
+The boys and girls of this story would not have accepted a
+machine-made, standardized house if one had been offered them, ready
+for use. There was a special purpose for which their house was to be
+planned and built, as there generally is in the case of any real house.
+No style A, B, or C, chosen from any series of pattern-built or moulded
+houses, could fulfil such a purpose; and even if it could, would they
+willingly give up all the fun of planning and building and furnishing?
+Would they forego the lessons of experience to be learned from all this
+work? This is always a large part of the satisfaction which comes to
+any one who builds his own house. In the present instance it was the
+chief motive, since the boys and girls who were planning this house
+were not expecting to make their home there.
+
+_Why the House Was Built._--What, then, was the purpose for which this
+house was to be built; and what were the specific problems involved in
+realizing this purpose? It was to be a practice house for the girls
+of the household technology course. This meant that it should be, so
+far as possible, a model house; but it must of necessity be a simple
+one. Economy, always a safe guide, was a most important factor in
+determining the character of the design. A limited appropriation--about
+$1000--for building material was available. Economy of space as well as
+of expense was also important. The only available land was a triangular
+lot in the corner of the school yard, 665 square feet in area. This
+limited the dimensions of the floor plan to 24 by 35 feet. It was
+decided to develop the design within these dimensions, on a rectangular
+plan, with one story and a hip roof, because such a design would
+present comparatively easy problems in framing and insure a building of
+pleasing external proportions.
+
+
+THE GENERAL DESIGN AND THE PLAN
+
+In attacking the problem of design the method of approach was
+determined by the fact that school-girls and school-boys were to be
+the architects and builders. House planning, home decoration, and
+household management were important subjects of study on the part of
+the girls and various forms of drawing and constructive work were
+required of all the boys of this school; so they all felt that they
+had a right to contribute something out of their study and experience
+that might be of value in working out this problem. The design must
+therefore be a composite of the best features of many studies.
+
+_A Composite Design._--The rooms required for a house of this character
+were thought to be a hall, a living room, a dining-room, a kitchen,
+a pantry, a bedroom with a closet, a bath room, and a linen closet.
+Nothing short of this outfit of rooms would satisfy the demands of
+a house to be used to give practical training in all the essentials
+of plain housekeeping and in the entertainment of guests. With these
+requirements in mind and with full knowledge of all the limitations
+of the problem, the girls of the junior and senior classes, who were
+taking the course in household technology, entered into a lively but
+friendly competition with each other to produce the most acceptable
+design and draw the best plan. So many excellent plans resulted from
+this competition that it was difficult to select the best. It was
+therefore decided to combine in a new and final plan the best features
+of several studies that seemed to meet the conditions of the problem
+with equal success. Two of these were selected as having the greatest
+number of good points. From these the final floor plan was developed
+and the necessary modifications made in the original drawings to make
+the general design of the building fit the plan.
+
+[Illustration: Floor plan of the model house]
+
+_The Hall._--It may be
+of interest to note how some of the details of the problem of design
+were worked out for the final plan. Beginning with the hall, it was
+easily seen that economy of space required that the room should have
+small dimensions. In fact, it did not need to be a separate room
+at all. It could easily be a space between the living room and the
+dining-room, separated from both by means of portières and joined
+upon occasion with either room or with both, thus making possible
+a reception room or a dining-room of good size, or one large room.
+Of course, the central idea of a hall must not be lost sight of in
+providing for a desirable extension of other rooms. It should suggest
+a warm welcome to the guest; and here is where the fireplace may
+fulfil the double function of giving the cheer of the hearth-stone at
+all times and the comfort of fire when warmth is needed. The absence
+of a stairway, since none was needed, was a favourable circumstance.
+Appropriate decoration and furnishing in due time were to add a few
+distinguishing marks so that the house could retain, without any
+appreciable sacrifice of space, the dignity of an entrance hall.
+
+_The Living Room and the Dining-room._--The relative positions of the
+living room and the dining-room, as already stated, were determined
+by the location of the hall. The purpose of each was distinct and
+self-evident, and determined the features of design that lent
+themselves most readily to appropriate decoration. In the living room
+the floor, the wall spaces, and the ceiling needed consideration with
+regard to their final treatment, to give pleasing proportions and
+harmonious colouring. The same was true of the dining-room, though its
+different purpose suggested a different design. An abundance of light
+was important for both rooms, hence the large, multiple windows. Such
+windows would also offer a good chance for pleasing drapery effects.
+
+_The Kitchen and Its Appointments._--No room demanded so much study
+as the kitchen. In the first place it was necessary to make provision
+for a relatively larger kitchen than would ordinarily be needed in a
+house of this size, because in this case it was designed to be used as
+a practice kitchen and must therefore be large enough to accommodate
+a considerable number of girls--at least eight--at one time. This
+point assumed so much importance in the minds of the young designers
+that they were constantly tempted to rob other rooms of the space that
+was due them in order to get a "nice, big kitchen." But by clever
+adjustments and combinations the necessary floor dimensions were
+secured without unduly cramping other features of the plan. The range,
+laundry tubs, and sink were conveniently located near each other with
+the tubs at such a height that when not in use the cover was flush
+with the top of the range, forming a shelf on which kettles and other
+kitchen utensils could be easily placed as they were moved back and
+forth from the range. It was thought that it would be very desirable,
+if not necessary, to have this shelf covered with zinc or some kind of
+sheet metal.
+
+It will be noted as a possible fault in the plan that the range is
+very near the door into the passageway leading to the bedroom, the
+living room, and the hall. This point received due consideration; but
+in view of the compensating advantages the arrangement was thought
+allowable, inasmuch as the door into the passageway would be used
+only occasionally. There seemed to be no more convenient location for
+the passageway, which was designed to give privacy to bedroom and
+bath room and, in cases of sickness or any emergency requiring it,
+easy communication between the kitchen and the bedroom.
+
+_Special Features._--The pantry was located between the kitchen and the
+dining-room for obvious reasons--to give easy communication in serving
+and to confine kitchen odours to their proper place. In place of a
+kitchen closet a cabinet was provided for as being on the whole the
+more serviceable of the two. It is always desirable to have an entry
+or lobby, with a convenient part of it reserved for the refrigerator;
+but the need of providing as much room as possible in the kitchen
+itself seemed to justify the omission of the lobby. Another unusual
+feature--this time not an omission--is to be found in the window of the
+bedroom closet. Such a window, although not common, was thought to be
+very desirable on sanitary grounds and as a possible protection against
+moths.
+
+_Early Plans for Decorating and Furnishing._--These were by no means
+all the features of design that had to be considered. As already
+suggested, there was much study given to the question of interior
+decoration and furnishing, even at this early stage. This was simply
+necessary forethought; for much of the attractiveness, restfulness,
+and homelike atmosphere of any house is created by the architect, who,
+in his arrangement of rooms, door-ways, and windows, disposes his wall
+areas so that they may be divided symmetrically and lend themselves
+naturally to colour toning, offering tempting spaces for a few choice
+pictures and opening up beautiful vistas. Such house-planning, begun
+with clear vision and followed with taste and delicacy in every detail,
+may often lead to a harmony of effects as pleasing to people of
+artistic temperament as a symphony is to those who enjoy a fine musical
+composition. In fact, the parallel between sympathetic gradations of
+form and colour and harmony of musical tones is a very close one, and
+the appreciation of it is by no means rare. Any intelligent person,
+on seeing a suite of rooms designed and arranged by a real artist,
+though he may not understand why, will be impressed by the rhythm
+of space divisions, the harmony of colours, the lack of any jarring
+or discordant notes in the decoration, the simplicity, fitness, and
+real beauty, not of any particular part, perhaps, but of the whole
+combination. We often find ourselves using the same language whether we
+are describing the work of an artist-architect or the work of a musical
+composer.
+
+
+FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF DESIGN
+
+_Adaptation to Purpose._--Our young architects discovered that there
+are certain fundamental principles or laws that must be observed at
+the very beginning, if a really good and true design is to be made.
+The first of these laws is the _law of adaptation to purpose_. The
+application of this law was illustrated in the location of the various
+rooms in the plan of the house, in the dimensions agreed upon for
+each, and in the details of arrangement, especially in the kitchen
+and other rooms connecting with it. But this law is universal in its
+application. It determines not only the broad features of the plan but
+the details as well. It does not permit anything useless or superfluous
+to exist, for that would mean weakness. It aims at efficiency and
+strength. It dictates the details of construction all along the line,
+from the framing of the building to its finish and its decoration. It
+even determines the character of the furniture and the amount of it.
+Adaptation to purpose is a ruling principle.
+
+_Simplicity._--Another great principle that revealed itself as the
+plans of the house developed may be called the _law of simplicity_.
+This is one of the elementary laws of nature transferred to the realm
+of craftsmanship. It is an axiom of geometry that the straight line
+is the shortest distance between two points. Not less evident is the
+fact that when Nature undertakes to do anything she goes about it in
+the simplest and most direct way. The natural tendency of all motion
+is along a straight line--so reads the first law of motion. Analyze
+the most complex forms and processes of nature and we shall find them
+due to the harmonious combination of the simplest elementary lines
+and movements. But the same law of simplicity which invariably marks
+the works of nature gives strength and beauty also to the works of
+man. Thus, in discussing the various problems that developed as the
+designing of the house progressed, it was found--as of course it should
+have been--that the solution which met the test of simplicity, while
+satisfying the law of adaptation to purpose, was the true one.
+
+_Correlation._--A third great fundamental principle that found
+expression in these studies of the house plans was the _principle
+of correlation_. Not only must each part of the design be adapted
+to its use in the simplest possible manner, but it must support all
+other parts and receive support in return. It is like cooperation or
+team-work in play or in the practical affairs of life. Every room in
+a house bears some natural relation to every other room, and even the
+objects in the same room or in adjoining rooms must assist each other,
+whether their purpose be utility or decoration or a combination of
+both. Only by due attention to the mutual relations of the various
+elements that must enter into the composition, can the designer produce
+those pleasing space effects, those blendings of colour tones, those
+manifest relations between the various objects, useful or decorative,
+that give order, unity, and sympathetic feeling to a complete design.
+
+
+THE COLOUR SCHEME
+
+_The Floor the Foundation._--Almost unconsciously our young architects
+found themselves under the guidance of these three great fundamental
+principles of design. When they came to the problem of specifying the
+finish for the floors and other wood work of the hall, living room, and
+dining-room, they found that this problem was intimately associated
+with the larger question of the colour scheme as a whole. The mutual
+dependence of all the elements concerned could not be overlooked.
+It was evident that the floor, which is the foundation of the room,
+should be darker than the walls and ceiling and the general tone of the
+furnishings, in order to give the suggestion of sufficient weight and
+firmness for the support of the entire room and all it might contain.
+The effect of solidity could be produced by staining the floor boards
+or by providing a liberal supply of dark, rich-toned rugs, large ones
+as well as small ones. There was no question of carpets. These, of
+course, are not allowable in a model house. A few rugs were already
+available, and others could be procured by buying them or by making
+them. A properly toned floor, however, is desirable, even with a most
+generous covering of rugs. It was therefore decided to give the floor a
+coat of stain when it was ready to be finished.
+
+_Importance of Colour Schemes._--But what was the colour to be? The
+designers were thus brought face to face with that difficult but
+important problem which all who plan houses have to solve before they
+can hope to bring their work into harmonious adjustment with the
+various natural and human conditions that must be satisfied in the
+final product, if it be made a good example of the designer's art.
+The problem of the colour scheme is fundamental. Upon this depends
+not only the tone of the floors, the walls, and the ceilings, but
+also, to a certain extent, as has already been suggested, the kind of
+woods to be used in the interior finishing, and whether they are to be
+painted, stained, or left in their natural colours. It will determine
+the material and the colours of the portières, curtains, cushions,
+lamp shades, picture frames, vases; in fact, it will largely settle
+the decorative character of every article placed in the rooms. The
+consideration of movable objects, however, may be deferred till the
+more substantial and fixed elements are decided upon.
+
+_Southern Exposures and Cool Colours._--In settling the all-important
+question of the colour scheme the first point to be considered was
+the location of the rooms with reference to light and to external
+surroundings. Rooms that have a southern exposure and nothing to
+interfere with their being flooded with sunlight need to be protected
+against the glare of too much light. For such rooms dull tones of
+colour are the best--dull browns, soft gray-greens, certain blue
+tones, and the medium grays--light, cool colours that counteract the
+overbrilliancy of direct sunlight and give a positively tempered
+feeling to the atmosphere of a room. Incidentally, too, perhaps because
+they are the tints associated with distant views, the cool colours make
+a room seem larger than it really is.
+
+_Northern Exposures and Warm Colours._--Northern rooms, on the other
+hand, do not generally suffer from excess of sunlight and heat. Warm
+colours are needed in such rooms. Deep reds, rich yellows, and golden
+browns will seem to bring sunlight into a sunless room. Our designers
+noted the fact that many of the rooms in the house they were planning
+must be comparatively dark. The house was to face the high brick walls
+of the neighbouring school building, not more than twenty-five feet
+distant, and its principal rooms had a northern exposure. A warm colour
+treatment, therefore, was unquestionably needed. Should red, brown, or
+yellow be the prevailing tone? The deciding point was the location of
+the hall and its relations to the other rooms. It was, first of all,
+the hall, the place of welcome for the guest; but it was dark. Its
+walls must have the sunniest of all colours--a rich golden yellow. The
+same would serve the needs of the living room, or perhaps a brown with
+yellow enough in it to be well in tune. The dining-room could safely be
+darker and more luminous, in pleasing contrast with the golden yellow
+of the hall; but it must not be decidedly red. The ceilings of these
+three rooms, whether beamed or not, since they must be lighter than the
+walls, could have the same or nearly the same tint. This might well be
+a light corn yellow.
+
+The colouring of the walls of the bedroom, bath room, and kitchen was
+not so important a question as the decoration of the three front
+rooms. Utility and sanitary conditions were important things to be
+considered. Light tints were decided upon, which in the bedroom might
+be relieved, in the finishing touches, by delicate stenciled figures in
+some warm tone.
+
+_Interior Woodwork._--With the colour scheme settled it was a
+comparatively easy matter to decide what should be the general tone
+and character of the interior woodwork. The floors of the three front
+rooms, since they were to be closely associated, required the same
+solid colour, which could well be a walnut brown, darker than any
+of the walls. Fumed oak trimmings were thought desirable for the
+dining-room and gum wood for the living room, either of which could be
+extended to the hall; but ivory white for the living room and the hall,
+leaving the oak for the dining-room, found much favour. It was finally
+decided, however, to adopt for the three front rooms the combination
+of natural woods first suggested. The bedroom and bath room, where
+suggestions of cleanliness are peculiarly appropriate, were specified
+to be finished in white. Yellow southern pine was decided upon for the
+kitchen and its accessory rooms.
+
+
+ORGANIZING THE WORK OF CONSTRUCTION
+
+As soon as the chief features of design were decided upon, preparations
+were made for carrying them out in the actual work of building; for the
+house was not to be a "castle in air." The first step was to put these
+ideas on paper and work out the details of construction in clearly
+executed and accurately dimensioned drawings. These included, as the
+first to be used, the working drawings for the framing and other rough
+woodwork, blue print copies of which were to be put into the hands of
+the boys of the elementary vocational school, who were to carry out
+this part of the building plans.
+
+[Illustration: Front or north elevation of the model house]
+
+_The Working Drawings._--A considerable number of detailed drawings
+had to be made before the work of construction could be wisely begun.
+This furnished an interesting set of problems for the mechanical
+drawing groups of the technical high school. The material for this work
+consisted of rough sketches in pencil, but with the correct dimensions
+as determined in the plan accepted as the result of the competition in
+design. These preliminary sketches required much study on the part of
+both boys and girls, under proper guidance, in order to find out what
+the elements of construction should be, what dimensions were required,
+and how the various parts should be put together. It was an experience
+of great value to all, but especially to those boys who were looking
+forward to architectural draughting as a possible vocation. They got
+an inside view of the importance, on the one hand, of accurate working
+drawings as a basis for good construction and, on the other hand, a
+practical illustration of the necessity of a thorough knowledge of
+constructive principles, in order to make correct working drawings.
+They saw that the efficient architect must be a builder, acquainted
+with all the detailed processes employed by the carpenter or mason,
+informed upon all the conditions to be met, and knowing the best ways
+of meeting them. They gained impressions which should help them, in
+studying the work of great architects, to look beyond the exterior,
+however pleasing it may be, for those elements of strength and beauty
+that characterize all good workmanship.
+
+[Illustration: All the Rough Carpentry Was Assigned to Boys of the
+Woodworking Section of the Vocational School. Plate I]
+
+_How the Work Was Distributed._--It will be recalled that boys and
+girls were to be coworkers in the designing, planning, and building
+of the house. The boys were to be held responsible for the drawings,
+the decorating after designs made by the girls, and the higher grades
+of woodwork, including the finishing of the rooms and the making of
+the furniture. They were to do the wiring for the electric lights, the
+bells, and the interior telephones; and they were to install all the
+fixtures in connection with this wiring. Boys from the metal-working
+sections were to do the necessary piping for gas and water and some
+of the work of plumbing; but, since the laws regulating plumbing are
+strict and well enforced, as they should be, it was necessary to keep
+this most essential feature of the work under charge of licensed
+plumbers. But this requirement did not remove even the plumbing of
+the building from the field of public school work; for, fortunately,
+this city has a well-equipped plumbing school in the trades school
+department, under the direction of licensed plumbers of high standing,
+who were glad to have given them, as an exercise for their classes, a
+practical problem in house plumbing. The boys in the forging classes
+were not overlooked in the distribution of the work on the house. Many
+of the fixtures needed for use or ornament were designed to be made
+in the school forge shop. The girls designed and made rugs, curtains,
+portières, and cushions as a part of their school work in weaving and
+stencilling; and they contributed many decorative articles in clay,
+copper, leather, and other materials. Thus every technical department
+of the school was brought into service; for in the building of a house
+there is to be found something to enlist the interest of every boy and
+girl.
+
+[Illustration: The Boys of the Forging Classes of the Technical High
+School Were Not Overlooked in the Distribution of the Work on the
+House. Plate II]
+
+_Boy Foremen in Charge._--To bring about the right distribution of
+the work and to marshal the working forces effectually required the
+oversight and management of an experienced instructor. But much of the
+work of direction was delegated to competent boys. The preliminary
+tool work in the school shops had revealed those who were especially
+observant and capable as leaders, and those who worked best under
+specific directions. Thus the twenty boys of the vocational school who
+set the posts and framed the house worked sometimes in pairs--one
+being the chief foreman and the other the helper--sometimes in gangs
+of three or four under a foreman. The plan was varied according to the
+nature of the work in hand. When leaders of more technical knowledge
+and skill were needed, as was the case in setting the window frames and
+directing the shingling, capable boys from the technical high school
+were placed in charge of groups of younger boys from the vocational
+school. In this way the work was advanced in several directions at the
+same time; and the advantage was not all in the advancement of the
+house construction. It was a delightful and profitable experience for
+all the boys, not unlike that which some of them will doubtless repeat
+when school days are over and they take their place in the more serious
+affairs of life. In after years they may look back upon the first
+house that they helped to build and recall the part they took, their
+companions in the work, and the good time they had withal.
+
+
+SOME DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION
+
+_Setting Batter Boards, Posts, and Sills._--The first step in actual
+construction was to mark off the lot and set the batter boards. These
+were made by driving three stakes to form a right angle about four
+feet from the point where each of the four main corners of the house
+was to be located. Two rough boards, one for each side of each angle,
+were nailed horizontally to each of the four sets of stakes, with their
+upper edges all brought to the same level. It is very important to set
+these batter boards with accuracy, since their function is to carry the
+lines which mark the dimensions and level of the ground floor. In the
+present instance their first use was to locate the concrete posts on
+which the sills of the house were to rest. Twenty-two of these posts,
+which were 4 feet long and 8 inches square, were put in position by
+first setting moulds or boxes, the interior dimensions of which were
+those of the posts, 3 feet deep in the light soil and filling them with
+a mixture of concrete and crushed rock. It was not thought necessary
+to remove the moulds after the hardening of the concrete. In fact, the
+sills were framed and placed in position resting on these boxes before
+sufficient time had been given for the concrete to harden. The sides of
+the boxes, however, were scored with a saw cut so that they could be
+easily broken off just below the ground, exposing the projecting ends
+of the concrete posts for about one foot. The sills were of 6 by 8-inch
+first quality spruce. They were set on the 6-inch face, the two long
+sills being spliced over posts, using a long halved joint. Mortise
+and tenon joints, draw-bored and pinned, were used at the corners. The
+floor timbers of 2 by 8-inch spruce were gained into the sills with
+the top faces flush with the top of the sill and crowning (_i. e._,
+bending) upward if at all. The spacing of the floor timbers was taken
+off at the sill on a strip of furring--spruce, 7/8 of an inch thick
+by 2 inches wide--which was moved out to the centre near the line of
+bridging and lightly nailed, bringing crooked timbers into line. The
+bridging was then nailed in, the outside last to prevent springing the
+sills.
+
+[Illustration: Plan A. Framing details]
+
+Referring to the accompanying sketch (Plan A) it will be noticed that
+the corner posts and centres were not mortised into the sills, but were
+simply butted on and heavily nailed or spiked. There was a time when
+carpenters would have regarded such a method as altogether wrong; but
+those were the days of great corner posts and heavy studding, placed
+two or three times as far apart as is the practice now. It was thought
+that placing the studs 16 inches on centres, which is the common
+practice in modern house framing, removed the necessity of mortising
+into the sill. Mortising is still recognized, however, as a good thing
+to do and is sometimes practised by first-rate carpenters. Plan A
+also shows how the outside walls were trussed over openings; and Plan B
+shows how the corners of the building were tied by the lapping of the
+double plate, and how the ceiling timbers and rafters were placed on
+the top of the plate.
+
+
+[Illustration: Plan B. Details of cornice, sill, and roof
+
+ A SHINGLES
+ B ROOF BOARDS
+ C RAFTER 2" × 6" 20" O.C.
+ D PLATE 4" × 4"
+ E ROUGH BOARDING
+ F STUD
+ G FRIEZE
+ H CROWN MOLD
+ I BED MOLD
+ J CEILING JOIST 2" × 6"
+ K GROUND
+ L LATH & PLASTER
+ M BASE
+ N FINISHED FLOOR
+ O LINING FLOOR
+ P FURRING
+ Q SILL
+ R CONCRETE POST 8" × 8"
+ S CORNER POST
+ T HIP RAFTER 3" × 8"
+ U FLOOR JOIST
+]
+
+The window frame details are shown in a series of cuts (Plan C) which
+for the sake of completeness are drawn to show also the interior
+finish, not usually represented in the framing drawings. A detailed
+description of these features of construction is unnecessary, since
+the dimensions and relations of the various elements and the technical
+terms by which they are known are all clearly indicated in the
+illustrations.
+
+[Illustration: Plan C. Details of interior finish
+
+ A OUTSIDE CASING I HEADER Q SURBASE
+ B BACK BAND J CORNER BLOCK R SILL 1-3/4" TH'K
+ C HEAD K ROUGH BOARDING S INSIDE CASING
+ D STOP 1/2" THICK L SHINGLES T SOFFIT
+ E SASH 1-3/8" ditto M WEIGHT U BED MOLD
+ F LATH & PLASTER N PULLEY STYLE V FINISHED FLOOR
+ G GROUND 3/4" TH'K O PARTING STRIP W BASE
+ H STUD 2" × 4" P STOOL CAP X LINING FLOOR
+]
+
+In the same series of cuts a detail of the base is shown which includes
+the framing, the base board, and the lath and plaster. It should be
+stated, however, that a substitute for lath and plaster was recommended
+to the student architects--a new product in paper board especially
+designed for walls and ceilings, which it was decided to use. The use
+of this material removed the necessity of the "grounds" shown in the
+drawings and always needed as a nailing base for the wood trim when
+the walls and ceilings are lathed and plastered. In the detail of the
+dado cap, which will be found on the page of construction drawings,
+the dotted lines show how the cap was to be expanded into a plate rail,
+requiring the addition of brackets with a bed moulding between, in the
+finishing of the walls of the dining-room. Among these drawings will
+also be found a detail showing a section of the beamed ceiling finish.
+
+It will be readily understood that none of the finishing work called
+for in the detailed drawings was begun until the rough carpentry on the
+house was practically completed. All the rough work, which included
+framing, boarding, shingling, laying of the lining floors, and putting
+up partitions, was assigned to boys of the woodworking sections of the
+vocational school. This is an elementary industrial or trade school,
+admitting from the grades below the high school boys who have attained
+the age of fourteen years and wish to learn some mechanical trade.
+It represents a new and promising experiment in American education.
+The building of this house furnished an excellent opportunity for the
+boys of this school to show the honesty of their purpose in enrolling
+themselves to learn the fundamentals of a trade and thus prove their
+right to have the chance.
+
+So the house was built by the combined efforts of the boys and
+girls of the public schools of this New England city, unassisted by
+professional architects or paid labourers. How they carried out with
+their own hands the designs for decorating and furnishing the house is
+told in the succeeding chapters of this book, which also suggests wider
+applications of the principles of household decoration as possible to
+be made in the homes of clever boys and girls throughout the country.
+To carry out these suggestions will mean work--but work of a kind that
+gives pleasure to the worker and to many others. It was work for the
+young designers and builders of whom this story tells, but they said
+it was "great fun," and there really is no pleasure quite equal to
+that found in doing with one's own hands an exceptionally good thing.
+The true craftsmen of all time have found it so. One of these master
+workmen, Stradivarius, the violin maker, so George Eliot tells us, made
+his confession thus:
+
+ " ... God be praised!
+ Antonio Stradivari has an eye
+ That winces at false work and loves the true,
+ With hand and arm that play upon the tool,
+ As willingly as any singing bird
+ Sets him to sing his morning roundelay,
+ Because he likes to sing and likes the song."
+
+
+
+
+II
+
+DECORATIONS AND FURNITURE
+
+ Have nothing in your houses that you do not know to be useful, or
+ believe to be beautiful--_William Morris_
+
+
+The decorating and furnishing of a house have their true beginning
+in good architectural design. It is a mistake to proceed upon the
+theory that decoration necessarily implies something added for its
+own sake--something beautiful in itself but selected and applied
+without regard to the lines, spaces, and colours of the room in which
+it is to be placed and without considering the relation of this room
+to neighbouring rooms and to more remote surroundings. The truth is,
+a decorative object may or may not be intrinsically beautiful; but
+however beautiful it may be in itself, it finds its truest beauty in
+an appropriate setting. And the decorator who is actuated by the true
+spirit looks to the architect for inspiration and finds his greatest
+successes in acknowledging that leadership. To attempt to lead when
+one should follow is neither good art nor good sense.
+
+There is danger, perhaps, that this truth may be taken too seriously.
+It would also be a mistake to run to the other extreme and adopt at
+the outset a rigid plan of decoration and furnishing, specified like
+contract work to be carried out and completed on a certain date soon
+after the house is built. The problem is one of growing interest,
+especially as regards furniture, pictures, and the smaller objects of
+use or beauty, and for its best and happiest solution requires time
+and study. Only the broad and fundamental features can be settled in
+advance. The important thing is to have the main lines, dimensions,
+space relations, and colour schemes settled with due regard to utility
+and appropriateness and, as the work of construction proceeds, to keep
+all details in harmony with this general plan.
+
+
+THE FLOORS, THE WALLS, AND THE CEILINGS
+
+_Colour Harmony in the Model House._--It will be remembered that
+the colour scheme of the hall, living room, and dining-room of our
+model house was settled quite early in the development of the design.
+Standing near the centre of the living room and looking through the
+hall into the dining-room, one may see at a glance how some of the
+details of decoration were worked out in keeping with the general
+treatment. The walnut brown stain of the floors gives a good foundation
+of colour. It flows easily into the lighter browns and yellows of all
+the lower wall spaces. The suggestion of olive green in the frieze of
+the living room offers a pleasing contrast with the prevailing browns
+and harmonizes well with the woodwork of this room, which, it will be
+remembered, was designed to be finished in gum wood. This beautiful
+wood, when properly treated, presents a surface of satin-like texture
+and soft colour tone. In the dining-room a corner of which is shown
+in the frontispiece, the frieze lends a warmth of colour where it is
+needed and is in keeping with the fumed oak trim. The wide openings
+into the hall from the rooms on each side of it, together with the
+long, unbroken lines of the beamed ceilings, give the impression of
+generous width. The plain wall spaces, though varied in tone and
+relieved of monotonous spacings by the location of the necessary doors
+and windows, are of great assistance in increasing the apparent size of
+the room. Plain walls are also the best of backgrounds for pictures.
+_Redecorating Old Houses._--It is, of course, true that the decorating
+and furnishing of a house or an apartment cannot always have a new
+and original architectural design as the basis for the solution of
+the problems involved. As a matter of fact, in the great majority of
+cases, the houses in which homes are made are already built and have
+been previously occupied. Often they are very old houses, presenting
+difficult and even impossible tasks for the decorator. Sometimes,
+however, such houses are all the more desirable if they bear the marks
+of age that suggest a past of dignity and charm. But the spirit which
+inspires the artist in decorating and furnishing a house already built
+is the same as that which controls his thought when he can begin with
+the foundation of a new and original design. His first thought is to
+discover how beauty may be enhanced and at the same time unity of
+purpose and harmony of treatment be preserved. His constant care is to
+avoid incongruous elements, however beautiful they may be in themselves
+or however appropriate in other houses. His general aim is to use his
+art to develop the design as it is, if there be any design at all, and
+make the most of it.
+
+_Decoration as a Corrective._--But this does not prevent him from
+attempting to counteract the blunders of faulty design and bad
+architecture. Such correction, indeed, forms a large part of the work
+of decorators and furnishers, both professional and amateur. If the
+lines and space divisions of a room be not good, the decoration must
+be planned with a view to giving the needed harmony of proportions,
+or at least the appearance of it. If the ceiling be too high, it may
+be made to "look" lower by carrying the ceiling paper or tinting one
+or two feet down the walls of the room to meet the picture moulding.
+The effect of reduced height is accentuated by a high base board or by
+wainscoting. If the ceiling be too low, the depressing effect may be
+largely overcome by extending the picture moulding along the top of the
+wall spaces close to the ceiling. This is a desirable thing to do in
+the living rooms of most modern houses. Striped wall papers of proper
+tones may be used in low rooms with good effect in increasing their
+apparent height. Bad wall spacing may also be corrected by enlarging
+door-ways, substituting portières for the doors, and by arranging
+the drapery over windows to give the effect either of increasing or
+of diminishing their height, as the conditions may require. _Wall
+Papers._--Probably no element of decoration furnishes so many pitfalls
+to ensnare the unwary as wall papers do. It is easy to fall a victim
+to a captivating design as it appears in the few square feet of wall
+paper displayed on the dealer's rack. The same interesting figure,
+spread out in endless repetition on the four walls of the living room,
+may create an atmosphere of unrest and positive discomfort keenly felt
+by sensitive persons. A wise choice cannot be made in the absence of
+all the conditions that should really determine it. After all, it is
+not the paper which is beautiful in the roll that should be selected,
+but only that which will become beautiful when hung upon the walls of
+a certain room. Papers with large figures should be avoided unless
+there is a special reason for using them. They always have the effect
+of reducing the apparent size of everything associated with them.
+They make a small room appear dwarfish and a large one over decorated
+unless well relieved by plain spaces harmonizing in colour with the
+large-figured patterns. Strong contrasts in colour values should also
+be avoided, not only between the designs and the ground colour of the
+wall paper itself, but also between the paper and other objects of
+importance in the room. The principle of gradation in colour values,
+which does not as a general thing allow the placing together of light
+and dark shades or tints, is almost as important as harmony of colour
+tones.
+
+_Nature of Decorative Design._--The one fact never to be lost sight
+of by the decorator is the real nature of true decorative design. It
+is never a picture. While it may suggest the natural forms of plants
+or animals, it does not aim to represent them in a naturalistic way.
+Some of the best decorative designs do not even suggest natural forms;
+but, whether they do or not, the central idea is the repetition of good
+combinations of line and form in closely related colours and values
+on a flat surface. If natural forms are used, they should be more or
+less highly conventionalized. Anything that destroys the idea of flat
+surfaces in the same plane is a false note in wall decoration. In the
+nature of the case, a wall can have but one plane. Clusters of flowers
+or patterns of any kind that seem to hang in front of this plane, or
+back of it, are out of place and therefore offend the sense of fitness.
+Such incongruities are sometimes so pronounced that they positively
+shock the sensibilities of refined people. Extreme examples have been
+known to give such pain to sensitive persons as to drive them from the
+room.
+
+_Advantage of Plain Walls._--Decorative designs, however, are not
+essential in wall papers. The main point in the treatment of walls is
+to secure and preserve a good background. If one is in doubt as to
+the kind of figure or pattern to be used, which is often a perplexing
+question, it is well to leave them out altogether. Plain walls are
+always good if the colour tone is right; for colour is the main thing
+in wall decoration. The decorative effects of form may be brought out
+in the portières and window draperies, which may easily carry more
+elaborate patterns when associated with plain walls than is desirable
+with figured wall decorations. In fact, with figured walls plain
+portières and curtains are much to be preferred. In our model house,
+as has been explained, the wall decorations were designed to offer a
+plain background of colour. The figured borders of the portières and
+curtains, combined with the careful gradation in the colouring of the
+floors, wall spaces, and ceiling, gave such a variety of tone to this
+background that nothing further was needed to avoid monotony.
+
+_Trial Needed in Doubtful Cases._--It is, indeed, a good rule to omit
+whatever is unnecessary. To observe this rule wisely is to escape much
+that is positively bad in decoration. Overwrought designs, too great
+variety in decorative material, too many decorative objects, however
+great their individual beauty, too many odd pieces of furniture, too
+many interesting things in whatever direction one may turn, create an
+oppressive and disquieting atmosphere and a feeling of unrest which
+it should always be the aim of home decoration to dispel. And yet it
+may not always be best to set aside our treasures because they do not
+seem perfectly suited to the general scheme of decoration or are not
+apparently needed to complete it. It is, in fact, often very difficult
+to determine where the line should be drawn between what is needed and
+what is not needed. The fact that nothing seems to be lacking is not a
+final test if one has at hand useful or beautiful things that may be
+introduced into a scheme of decoration already well thought out and be
+given a trial. Such experimenting will often reveal unsuspected needs
+or add a new charm that at once proves its right to be retained.
+
+To take a step like this, somewhat out of line with accepted rules
+as strictly interpreted, is entirely safe if this step is dictated
+by good taste and does not lead the young decorator too far afield.
+Exceptional treatment of any kind should show proper restraint, and
+such restraint, when it is plainly indicated in any work of art, is in
+itself an attractive feature.
+
+_Precise Rules not Always Practicable._--The truth is, the rules of
+decoration, though founded upon fundamental principles of art, are not
+rules of precision like those founded upon mathematical principles.
+In the nature of the case they must in their application yield more
+or less to circumstances. It is, for example, a good general rule
+to determine the colour scheme and background first and accommodate
+other decorative features to these as a foundation; and yet it is
+possible for a situation to be so exceptional as to justify a complete
+reversal of this rule. Here is a concrete case. A young artist was the
+fortunate possessor of a considerable number of Japanese and Chinese
+embroideries and other Oriental ornaments. He wished to make these the
+main decorative materials for one of his rooms. The embroidered figures
+were in yellow and white on a deep, strong blue, the general effect
+being quite dark. There were in the collection several prints, showing
+the typical dull reds, dark blues, and yellows of Japanese art. Now the
+room itself happened to be one that, under the general principle of
+colour schemes as determined by exposure and other fixed conditions,
+would demand warm colours on its walls. It would easily support a rich
+red frieze with appropriate combinations in floor, dado, and ceiling.
+This would set off well the dark oak trim and the mahogany furniture,
+but it would rule out the Oriental decorations. One or the other must
+give way; and, since the value of these decorative materials was beyond
+question, it was decided to try them, even at the cost of setting aside
+the general rule. The whole matter resolved itself into selecting a
+proper background for these beautiful pictures and embroideries; and
+for these the best colour was a gray blue--the coldest of colours. But
+when the whole decorative scheme was carried out to completion and the
+cold background was fully employed in setting off the rich colours and
+exquisite workmanship of the Oriental prints and draperies, all the
+circumstances that ordinarily determine the choice of backgrounds were
+forgotten in the charm of originality. No one thought of the exposure
+as requiring warm colours, the dark oak trim was not noticed, and the
+mahogany furniture was still in keeping. The result was so absolutely
+satisfying that no one who saw it could question the good taste
+displayed in this very original plan of decoration.
+
+But such exceptional cases should not shake our confidence in the
+fundamental principles of decoration. It is true that these principles
+cannot be reduced to formulas to be applied invariably in all cases,
+and it is unreasonable to assume that any form of treatment is the only
+one possible in any given case. Modifications in the application of
+these principles are always possible, but the principles themselves are
+as unalterable as the Mosaic law. One is, indeed, tempted to summarize
+them thus as the
+
+
+TEN COMMANDMENTS OF DECORATION
+
+ Thou shalt have no household gods except those that be beautiful
+ or those that be useful.
+
+ Thou shalt not make unto thyself any likeness that is in the
+ heaven above or in the earth beneath, or in the waters under the
+ earth, that does not find an appropriate setting in thine house.
+
+ Thou shalt not look in vain upon the creations of the great
+ masters of decorative art.
+
+ Remember the colour scheme and keep a good background.
+
+ Honour the original design, however old it may be, and make the
+ most of it. Thou shalt not hesitate to correct the blunders of
+ faulty design and bad architecture.
+
+ Thou shalt not kill thy neighbours or thy friends with
+ over-decorated wall papers or oppressive decorations of any kind.
+
+ Thou shalt not bring together incongruous articles nor permit
+ insane arrangements of anything that is thine.
+
+ Thou shalt not permit any false note to mar the harmony of thy
+ decorations.
+
+ Thou shalt not imitate thy neighbour's house or anything that is
+ thy neighbour's, for it is the glory of the good decorator to show
+ originality but at the same time to acknowledge his dependence
+ upon those who have preceded him.
+
+
+THE FURNITURE
+
+_Relation of Furniture to Decoration._--So much for the treatment
+of floors, walls, and ceilings. We may now turn to the more special
+consideration of those objects of use or beauty that are to be
+associated with these backgrounds--furniture, pictures, lamp shades,
+and small ornaments. That these are closely related to decoration
+has been implied in all that has been said. They are, in fact, in
+themselves elements in the decorative scheme and as such must obey
+the same laws. Their value, however, depends more or less upon their
+utility, and for this reason they seem to require consideration
+somewhat apart from their merely decorative functions. This is
+especially true of furniture, which would have very little reason for
+being if it were not for its usefulness.
+
+In designing the furniture for the model house the questions that
+constantly suggested themselves were: What is this piece of furniture
+under consideration to be used for? What form, construction, and finish
+will enable it to give the best service? What features of design are
+needed to render it suited to its surroundings? In considering the
+furniture for the model house it was most natural to apply these tests
+to the various rooms in order.
+
+[Illustration: A library desk in fumed oak]
+
+_Hall of the Model House._--First, there is the hall. This is the room
+into which a visitor is first admitted, and from its atmosphere he gets
+his first impressions. But in this house it is a very small room and
+designed to serve not merely as a place for the formalities of welcome
+but also as an expansion of the rooms on either side. Its furniture
+must consist largely of the fireplace. There is no room for a hall
+settle nor even for a chair. A mirror, simply but richly framed, might
+hang on the wall near the front door, balanced by a picture on the
+opposite wall behind the door. An umbrella rack should stand outside on
+the porch.
+
+[Illustration: A hall chair]
+
+[Illustration: A hall settle--simplicity, strength, dignity]
+
+_Hall Furniture in General._--The halls of modern houses vary greatly
+in their relative importance. In some the traditions of the old English
+manor houses seem partially to survive. In mediæval England the hall
+was the principal room, if not the only one comfortably furnished. When
+modern houses combine the living room and library or reception room
+with the hall, there is need of something more than hall furniture
+of the formal kind. The requirements of comfort must be met. But,
+generally speaking, hall furniture is of little real use. Odd chairs,
+attractive by reason of their oddity, the richness of the materials
+used in their construction, or some other assertive quality, but not
+fit to sit in, are suitable or at least excusable in the hall. The hat
+and coat rack of our fathers has been declared insane and no longer
+appears in well-regulated houses. In place of it is found the hall
+settle, which is of real use. It should be designed on simple lines and
+give the impression of strength and dignity. If the hall is to be used
+as a waiting room for guests, a few good chairs, conveniently placed,
+will be needed for their comfort and a choice picture or two on the
+walls will add greatly to their pleasure.
+
+[Illustration: Two Morris chairs that invite to solid comfort]
+
+[Illustration: A satisfactory writing desk]
+
+_Living Room Furniture._--In furnishing living rooms there is bound to
+be a wide range for the exercise of good taste because of the variety
+of needs to be met and the large facilities afforded in the markets
+for meeting these needs with due regard to artistic requirements. It
+will be quite impossible to go into detail in discussing so large a
+topic. The important thing is to keep in mind the central idea of a
+living room--the place of all places where the freedom, comfort, and
+protection of home life are to be enjoyed. The very atmosphere of
+the room should suggest simplicity, sincerity, and good cheer. Every
+article of furniture should be there to serve a genuine need, and it
+should be strong enough to do its full duty. Spider-legged, top-heavy
+tables; light, weak chairs; chairs on casters or rockers; sofas with
+carved backs or couches with none at all,--these have no place in the
+living room. The long, straight lines of the craftsman or mission
+style of furniture are in the right direction; but if these be used at
+all they must be made quite general, since few other styles harmonize
+with them. Wicker or reed furniture is a notable exception. When well
+designed it will fit in almost anywhere.
+
+[Illustration: An ample library table]
+
+[Illustration: A plain but useful magazine stand]
+
+The frequent combination of the library with the living room requires a
+suitable adjustment of the furniture to this use. A plain, serviceable
+magazine rack, which may be easily made, will relieve the tables of an
+accumulation of weeklies and monthlies. Moderately low bookcases, with
+or without doors, are to be preferred to the more ordinary high ones
+because this form harmonizes better with the lines of a room, which are
+generally longer horizontally than vertically. If doors are used, it
+is well to break up the glare of the glass by heavy sash, the spacing
+of which may be arranged in a very pleasing manner. Good design in
+library tables calls for ample size. Firmness and convenience as well
+as satisfactory proportions should control the choice of a writing desk.
+
+[Illustration: A low bookcase with sash doors]
+
+_Dining-room Furniture._ Only a few elements enter into the design for
+the furnishing of a dining-room; but they are evident and should have a
+controlling influence. The table and chairs are for a definite purpose
+and this should show itself in good design. Heavy construction is
+permissible since the chairs are to be moved but little and the table
+is practically stationary. Moreover, weight and generous dimensions
+are suggestive of bounty and good service. The rectangular extension
+table is most readily adjusted to varied demands, but the round table
+is preferable for the family circle; and for a company of twelve or
+fifteen a large, round, temporary table top, placed on an ordinary
+extension table, has been found very attractive.
+
+[Illustration: A round dining table]
+
+[Illustration: A sideboard of good proportions. Convenient and generous
+but not overdone]
+
+As comfort is the chief result to be obtained in furnishing a living
+room, so richness, within one's means, is an appropriate aim in
+furnishing a dining-room. The history of sideboard design might be
+cited in proof of this statement, if proof were needed. Probably no
+single article of furniture has been subjected to greater elaboration;
+but the desirable suggestion of plenty with convenience may be secured
+without overdoing it. The unique purpose of the sideboard makes it an
+interesting study for one who wishes to design and construct his own
+in conformity with the architecture of his dining-room. The buffet or
+serving table furnishes an equally interesting, though simpler, problem.
+
+[Illustration: A buffet of simple but effective design]
+
+For the care of the china, the built-in cabinet as a feature of
+the architecture of the room is to be preferred to the movable
+cabinet designed for this purpose, because of its richer decorative
+possibilities. Large, glazed doors are desirable in either case, not
+for the full display of china and glassware but to give a suggestive
+glimpse of it. As this cabinet is for decoration and not for show, it
+is well to avoid plain glass doors unbroken by sash. Leaded panes are
+frequently employed with good effect. The decorative effect of old
+and odd pieces of china--not too many of them--is most appropriately
+employed by the use of the plate rail; but it is better to leave
+the plate rail bare than to load it with commonplace crockery and
+inappropriate ornaments.
+
+[Illustration: A china cabinet. A part of the finish of the room]
+
+_Chamber Furniture._--The bedroom speaks for itself. A dainty freshness
+in all its appointments is conducive to sleep and rest, which it is the
+distinctive purpose of this room to provide. The necessary articles
+of furniture are a bed, a dressing table, a bureau or chiffonier, a
+few chairs, and, if there be no bath room attached, a commode or wash
+stand. A couch is an appropriate addition; and here, if anywhere,
+rocking chairs are allowable. When the bedroom must be used more or
+less as a living room or sewing room, as it too often unfortunately
+is, furniture to serve such uses must be provided. In selecting or
+designing all this furniture, lightness, and simplicity of design,
+combined with strength, should be allowed a controlling influence.
+The recognition of this idea has given great popularity to the brass
+or iron beds; but it is possible to design and construct beds of oak,
+maple, or other woods that harmonize with the rest of the furniture,
+carry out the idea of daintiness, and have sufficient strength for
+service.
+
+[Illustration: Leaded panes]
+
+Many of these suggestions on furniture design are being carried out
+in fitting up the model house described in our introductory chapter.
+A small house like this, limited to one story, does not permit great
+variety in its furnishings. Certain standard conditions, however, were
+to be met here, as everywhere else, and the young designers found much
+pleasure and great profit in working out the furniture problems. Some
+of the construction details will be given in the later chapters.
+
+[Illustration: A Duxbury chair]
+
+
+ARRANGEMENT OF THE FURNITURE
+
+_Arrangement Follows Selection._--The problem of furnishing a home is
+not fully settled when the questions of design have been answered and
+the right selections made. After selection comes arrangement, or, to
+speak more accurately, after a certain amount of selection a certain
+amount of arrangement; for, as has already been suggested, there is
+considerable dependence of one upon the other. It is not wise to drop
+the arrangement till the selection is complete, for the simple reason
+that the happiest choices are often the late ones, determined by the
+disposition of the earlier ones. And yet in the main the order as
+stated is the true one. It should be noted, too, that in arrangement
+there is a larger field for the exercise of individuality and taste.
+While artistic principles still hold sway, they yield more readily to
+exceptional interpretation by the ruling spirit of the household, to
+the demands of style, and to the larger number of possibilities for
+pleasing effects when the question is one of the arrangement of things
+already well chosen for their usefulness and for their artistic value.
+
+[Illustration: A dainty bed in white maple]
+
+_Utility the Controlling Principle._--The problems of arrangement,
+however, are by no means vague and uncertain. The natural law of
+adaptation to purpose is not difficult to follow. In some rooms
+obedience to it has become a settled custom. No one, for example, would
+think of placing the dining table in any other place than the centre
+of the dining-room or, if the room be a long one, in the centre of one
+end. The sideboard, serving table, and china closet likewise fall into
+their natural places. So also the bedroom and the hall, though perhaps
+to a less degree, present comparatively easy problems in furniture
+arrangement when due regard is paid to the purposes for which such
+rooms are designed.
+
+_Importance of Appropriateness._--But it is in the library and the
+living room that we find the most difficult and at the same time the
+most interesting problems. And this is due to the operation of the
+same law of adaptation to purpose. It is the variety of uses and the
+diversity of useful objects that make the problem somewhat complex.
+However refined and beautiful the different units may be, there
+must be some arrangement of them into working groups. The important
+elements should dominate and those of lesser importance should fall
+naturally into related but subordinate places. The easy corner with
+its couch, pillows, and its low seats, has a definite function to
+perform. So also have the piano and the music rack, the bookcases and
+library table, the Morris chairs and tabourettes, the window seats and
+screens, the writing desk and its proper lighting by window or lamp,
+the fireplace and all the accessories of comfort that may belong to
+it. The various centres of interest should be accentuated by grouping
+around them the most appropriate furnishings and the most suggestive
+decorative features. It may be well to add one word of caution, and
+that is that a proper balance should be maintained between the various
+centres of arrangement in order that no part of the room may seem
+neglected and bare.
+
+_The Danger of Overcrowding._--Finally, the one great danger to
+be avoided in meeting the requirements of good arrangement is the
+temptation to overcrowding. Many otherwise excellently appointed living
+rooms suffer from an embarrassment of riches. Such overcrowded rooms
+are worse than an overloaded ship because they cannot topple over and
+sink as one might well wish them to. To secure the right things and
+just enough of them, arranged with a proper balance between utility
+and beauty, is the true aim. It is as true to-day as it ever was in
+the arrangement and beautifying of the home, and, for that matter, in
+everything that concerns every-day life--just as true as it was in
+ancient times when men wrote those famous inscriptions over the doors
+of the temple at Delphi: over one, KNOW THYSELF, and over the other,
+THE GOLDEN MEAN OF NOT TOO MUCH.
+
+
+
+
+III
+
+PICTURES
+
+ I now require this of all pictures, that they domesticate me,
+ not that they dazzle me. Pictures must not be too picturesque.
+ Nothing astonishes men so much as common sense and plain dealing.
+ All great actions have been simple, and all great pictures
+ are.--_Ralph Waldo Emerson_
+
+
+The decoration of a room is generally not complete without pictures.
+There is, of course, great value in good pictures entirely aside
+from their decorative effect; and too great care cannot be exercised
+in their selection. But our present purpose is to consider them as
+decorative features; for, though a decoration is not a picture,
+pictures themselves are properly regarded as important elements in the
+general scheme of decoration. And this is especially true as regards
+matting and framing, the distribution of pictures upon the wall spaces,
+and the method of hanging them.
+
+_Importance of Space Relations._--A picture mat and frame are simply
+elements of finish, and their function is to give the picture a certain
+individuality and yet connect it harmoniously with the space in which
+it hangs. In fact, the wall space is a part of the framing of the
+picture. The importance of giving some study to the relations of all
+the spaces involved is evident. The mat and the frame should not be of
+equal width. Here is a fine opportunity to secure variety in spacing.
+No definite rules can be given; sometimes the one, sometimes the other
+should give way. Generally speaking, tall wall spaces require vertical
+pictures, and spaces longer horizontally demand horizontal pictures.
+But variation from this rule is possible and even necessary through the
+grouping of several pictures. In grouping, however, there is danger
+of being tempted to allow too many pictures. In the houses of the
+well-to-do, and even in the homes of those of moderate means, too many
+pictures, rather than too few, are often found. The example of one New
+England home, known to the author, may be mentioned. The house is new,
+of generous proportions, and it is the home of an artist. There are
+few pictures on the walls, but they are distributed with rare artistic
+effect. There are many good pictures stored in the attic because there
+is no suitable space in which to hang them.
+
+_The Japanese Way._--The Japanese have taught us many valuable lessons
+in art, and in the matter of the number of pictures to be displayed
+they have a very interesting lesson to teach. It is their practice
+to hang a single choice picture for a season in a space where it may
+be best enjoyed, and then after a time to replace it with another
+picture, and this, perhaps, by another if circumstances permit. There
+are many conditions that determine the selection of the picture to
+be displayed. It may be the preference of a guest, or it may be the
+season of the year, or, in fact, any occasion that may give a certain
+picture special significance. There is, in this singular custom, a very
+definite service which the picture is made to perform, and it is given
+an individuality which perhaps has no parallel in our own practice.
+
+_Grouping of Small, Simple Pictures._--If a considerable number of
+pictures are grouped together, it is quite essential that all the
+pictures of the group should be of similar character and tone and
+similarly framed. It is hardly possible for them to be all of the same
+size, nor, indeed, is such agreement desirable except in so far as is
+required to give proper balance to the group. Small pictures in light
+frames are, of course, the most desirable for such grouping, and if
+possible there should be an evident reason for the grouping. A series
+of photographs of a certain locality, for example, might form a group
+of four or five or even more pictures so that they could be easily seen
+together and so more thoroughly enjoyed. A collection of photographs
+in passe-partout bindings, especially if they deal with subjects in
+any way related, may form an attractive group. But pictures of any
+considerable size or those having decided individuality are generally
+not suited to any plan of grouping. They should appear by themselves,
+in frames and other surroundings which accentuate their peculiar merits.
+
+_The Kind of Frame._--The material of the frame, its colour, and the
+colour of the mat are determined by the tone of the picture. Oil
+paintings easily support gilt frames and should be hung in good light.
+Pictures of light values with white mats are well finished in narrow
+gilt frames. Carbon photographs and other pictures of dull tones, are
+appropriately framed in wood of dark or medium colour, and appear
+best when hung against a dark wall. The truth of these statements
+will hardly be questioned by any one who has a good sense of colour
+harmony. But there are many other elements that enter into a concrete
+problem of picture framing that cannot be brought under general rules
+or formulas. It is generally best to depend largely upon the tests
+of trial. In framing and hanging pictures, as in many other things,
+observation and experience are the best teachers. Some suggestions may
+be found in the following record of two actual framing problems that
+were satisfactorily solved.
+
+
+FRAMING AN OLD-TIME INTERIOR, DRAWN IN COLOURS
+
+The conditions which had to be met in this problem are plainly shown
+in the framed picture as it hangs on the wall. The picture itself is a
+small one, 8 inches wide and 13 inches long. It is interesting because
+of its representation of a sewing room in one of the high-class homes
+of the colonial period. The mistress and her two young daughters are
+engaged in sewing and embroidery. Patterns are displayed upon the wall;
+the furniture is appropriate and evidently an example of the best of
+the period. All these details are suggestive of the delightful home
+life of our grandmothers.
+
+Such a picture needs a mat to give it depth and to properly emphasize
+its details; and it requires a simple, narrow frame. The mat was
+accordingly made 2-1/2 inches wide and the frame 1 inch wide. The tone
+of the mat selected was a light bluish gray, forming a good connecting
+link between the bright colours of the picture and the gray of the wall
+against which it was to be placed. Since it was to hang directly over
+a fine old mahogany table, it was thought fitting to give the frame a
+mahogany finish, connecting the furniture shown in the picture with
+that of the room.
+
+The frame was made with mitred corners of perfectly plain, square-edged
+birch, which readily takes a mahogany finish. The stain was first
+applied with a brush, rubbed in, and allowed to dry. A surfacing coat
+of shellac, coloured to match the stain, was next put on, allowed to
+dry, and then carefully sand-papered, special care being taken to
+guard against rounding the edges and corners. A coat of varnish was
+next applied, which, after hardening for one week, was rubbed first
+with pumice stone and oil and finally with rotten stone and oil.
+A final coat of thin finishing varnish was then put on, which was
+lightly rubbed with rotten stone and water to give the half dull effect
+required to match the antique mahogany table.
+
+
+FRAMING A CARBON PHOTOGRAPH OF A MASTERPIECE
+
+The picture is a copy in sepia tones of Murillo's Saint Anthony, 16
+inches in height by 20 inches horizontally. The frame is made of
+quartered oak 3 inches wide, slightly convex but smooth; and it is
+well joined with mitred corners. A picture of this character needs
+no mat. Indeed, it would have been the height of presumption to
+strive to accentuate a masterpiece of such highly idealistic meaning
+and treatment. It must be left to itself as much as possible. The
+dimensions of the frame are therefore determined by the size of the
+picture itself.
+
+The picture hangs against a light gray wall in good light, somewhat
+apart from other pictures. It was a happy thought thus to recognize its
+dignity. It was given further distinction by finishing the oak frame
+so that it should not associate itself with the other woodwork in the
+room. Since the room in which the picture was to hang has a light ash
+trim and most of the furniture a mahogany finish, this requirement was
+easily met.
+
+But there are many ways of finishing a frame to avoid too close
+association with the commonplace that would have been anything but
+appropriate to such a picture as this. A gilt surface, a silver-gray
+tone, or a highly polished golden oak are possible blunders. Nothing
+should be done to call attention to the frame of any picture, least
+of all to one of such spiritual feeling as this one. The frame should
+seem to be a part of the picture, repeating its prevailing tones with
+a richness in keeping with the composition of the picture itself. The
+colour should be a rich, dark brown, but not so dark as to obscure the
+figure of the wood. The finish should be dull, but soft and smooth.
+
+There are several brown stains which, properly applied, would give
+the desired effect. For the colour it was thought best to rely upon
+Van Dyke brown, which may be used either with alcohol or turpentine.
+It is not desirable to use a water stain in a case like this because
+it would raise the grain, necessitating sand-papering, which should
+be avoided as much as possible on picture frames in order to keep the
+edges and corners intact. Ammonia fuming preserves the figure of the
+wood better than any other form of staining, but it was thought that
+the oak might not take on a tone dark enough to meet the requirements.
+It was decided, however, to try the fuming method and to tone up with
+a thin coat of stain if the effect proved to be not sufficiently dark.
+The ammonia process resulted in a rich, soft surface, but in a colour
+too light. A thin Van Dyke brown alcohol stain was therefore applied
+and when dry this was followed by a very thin coat of shellac--mostly
+alcohol--coloured to match the stain. This was to fill partially the
+grain of the wood. Finally, it was thoroughly coated with wax finish
+and well rubbed to restore the soft, satin-like surface.
+
+[Illustration: A group of passe-partouts]
+
+
+PASSE-PARTOUTS
+
+Framing pictures in passe-partout binding is one of the little
+arts of home decoration, though it is by no means an unimportant
+one. It is easy to learn and it involves small expense in time and
+money, but it furnishes a means of preserving many pictures of real
+worth in themselves or of value to their owners because of pleasant
+associations; and it is in itself a delightful occupation. It offers
+the same chances for artistic effects in colour harmony and contrasts,
+in spacing, and in the arrangements for hanging that the more difficult
+methods of framing do, with the added advantage that one need not be
+deterred by the question of expense from discarding an unsuccessful
+result and trying again.
+
+_Varieties of Binding._--Passe-partout binding is made in a great
+variety of colours. It costs from ten to twenty cents per roll of
+twelve yards, according to colour and quality, and it may be purchased
+of dealers in artists' supplies. For general use the ordinary width
+of binding--7/8 of an inch--is required; but extra narrow widths are
+supplied when it is desired to add a margin of a contrasting colour.
+For these margins the gold and silver narrow bindings are, with certain
+pictures, very effective; but white and other light colours are often
+used for this purpose.
+
+_Artistic Colour Effects._--The choice of the colour for the principal
+binding should be controlled mainly by the tone of the picture, with
+which, as a general thing, it should blend. If no mat be used, more
+or less of a contrast in colour between the picture and the binding
+is permissible; but the most artistic effects are obtained when mats
+are used. These should, of course, be in harmony with the colour
+tones and general character of the picture. It may be a harmony of
+agreement if there is a border of light tone between the picture and
+the mat, as illustrated in the accompanying drawing. Without such a
+border it will be necessary to show a pleasing contrast of tone. But
+in almost all cases when a mat is used the outer binding should repeat
+the predominant colour or some other prominent characteristic of the
+picture. For example, if it be a picture of an English hunting scene
+with mounted sportsmen in red coats, the mat may be of a light greenish
+hue and the binding red. If it be a landscape photograph in sepia
+tones, a white or light coffee-coloured mat with a dark brown binding
+is a good combination. A Scotch scene is appropriately framed in a
+plaid binding. In this case it is the subject of the picture rather
+than the colour that suggests the binding. But in all cases opportunity
+is offered for carefully selecting the colour combinations, planning
+the spacing, and arranging the grouping of pictures of like character.
+Thus one of the simplest of decorative processes presents large
+artistic possibilities.
+
+_An Actual Problem._--The various steps in the process of framing
+a picture in passe-partout binding may perhaps be best understood
+by giving an example of it. The actual problem is to frame a
+silhouette--an original drawing in black India ink on light gray paper,
+8 by 10 inches in size, with the longer dimension vertical.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--The materials and tools required are as
+follows: A piece of glass the size of the picture (8 by 10 inches),
+since no border is needed; two pieces of thin pasteboard, which may be
+cut from an old box cover, the same size as the glass; a generous yard
+of black passe-partout binding; two passe-partout rings, which cost
+five cents per dozen; a little photographers' paste; a sharp knife or a
+pair of scissors; and an awl or a pointed nail.
+
+_The Process._--With these materials in hand it will require scarcely
+more than twenty minutes to complete the work. The first step is the
+setting of the rings. This is accomplished by punching two small holes
+in one of the pieces of pasteboard two inches from the edge chosen
+for the top and about one inch from each side. Through these holes
+the points of the rings are pushed until the ring is close to the
+pasteboard. Bending the points over in opposite directions fastens
+the ring firmly. This is a comparatively large picture. Had it been
+small--say 4 by 5 inches or smaller--only one ring in the centre,
+fastened about 1-1/2 inches from the edge, would have been needed.
+
+The picture is now mounted on the second piece of pasteboard by
+fastening it at the upper corners with a little paste. It is desirable
+to use as little paste as possible. The two pieces of pasteboard are
+then brought together, care being taken that the rings are on the
+outside, and the glass laid over the picture. These parts are now
+ready to be bound together. The sides are bound first. This is done
+by cutting two pieces of the binding 1/4 of an inch longer than the
+short edges of the picture, wetting the gummed side and laying it
+along the edge of the glass so that it will lap 1/4 of an inch over
+the face of the glass. Each end of this binding will extend 1/8 of
+an inch beyond the glass. The rest of the binding is now folded over
+upon the pasteboard back, taking pains to draw it down close to the
+edge of the glass and pasteboard before it is permanently fastened.
+The 1/8 of an inch that projects at each end is then folded over the
+corner and pressed down as close as possible to the edge of the glass
+and pasteboard. The upper and lower edges are bound in the same way,
+excepting that the pieces of binding are first cut the same length
+as the edges over which they are to be pasted, and, before they are
+pasted on, the two corners on the side to be pasted to the glass are
+cut off 1/4 of an inch back at an angle of 45 degrees, and the other
+corners are also trimmed back to about 1/8 of an inch. The accompanying
+drawing shows more clearly how these binding strips are trimmed. The
+purpose of it is evident; for when the strips are pasted over the top
+and bottom edges of the glass, it is seen that they have been cut to
+give the appearance of mitred corners, and that when folded over the
+edges upon the back of the pasteboard no rough edges of binding are
+left exposed at the corners.
+
+[Illustration: How the binding strips are trimmed]
+
+One of the lessons of experience in this work is that it is well to
+take great pains in centring the binding strips accurately before
+pasting them on, as they do not stick well if the attempt is made to
+correct a mistake by removing the binding and pasting it on again.
+The more elaborate passe-partouts, requiring mats, borders, and double
+bindings, are scarcely more difficult than the simple example just
+described, though they will require more time. It is well to begin
+with the easier problems. When borders and double bindings are used
+the narrow passe-partout strips are pasted on first, with proper care
+to cut the mitres correctly and to centre the strips accurately before
+pasting them down upon the glass. The edges are bound last. This partly
+covers the brighter-coloured strips previously pasted along the edge of
+the glass, and leaves a narrow line of colour exposed as a border just
+inside the binding.
+
+
+HANGING PICTURES
+
+[Illustration: A correct method of hanging pictures]
+
+_How to Hang Pictures._--If wire be used for hanging pictures, it
+should be as small and inconspicuous as possible. In place of the
+braided steel wire, which may be needed for large pictures, a single
+brass or copper wire is much to be preferred for those of lighter
+weight. In all cases where the wire shows it should appear as two
+vertical lines against the wall and not as a single wire bent over
+a single hook in the form of an inverted V, so commonly seen and so
+manifestly failing to conform with any lines of a room. Levelling
+the picture may be easily managed by using only one wire, making it
+continuous through the screw eyes on the back of the picture. These
+screw eyes should be placed near the top of the frame--about one
+sixth the whole vertical width of the picture from the top--so that
+the picture may hang nearly flat against the wall. Whenever possible,
+however, pictures should be hung without showing the wire at all. This
+may be easily managed without seriously marring the finish of some
+rooms by driving two fine finishing nails in the part of the lower wall
+which is to come directly behind the top of the picture, allowing them
+to project about 1/2 of an inch and bending them up a little with
+a pair of pliers so that the wires will not slip off. Choice, small
+pictures may be hung in this way on fine upholstery tacks. It is often
+possible, when the wire must be exposed, to stop it just below the dado
+cap and thus avoid showing the wire over the frieze. Whenever it is
+necessary, as it often is, to suspend wires by means of the so-called
+picture hooks from a picture moulding or cornice strip placed above the
+frieze, some attention should be paid to the colour of these hooks.
+Bright metal hooks showing over a delicately coloured moulding are in
+bad taste. Some people prefer to use the inverted V suspension in order
+to reduce the number of these picture hooks. But it is far better to
+retain the straight, fine, and nearly invisible wires and colour the
+hooks to make them less conspicuous.
+
+In determining the height of pictures it is only necessary to remember
+that they are placed upon the walls to be enjoyed. While monotony
+in height is to be avoided, the average eye level should not be
+disregarded. The frontispiece illustrates an effective placing of a
+picture in the dining-room of the model house.
+
+
+
+
+IV
+
+THE ARRANGEMENT OF FLOWERS
+
+ "I know not which I love the most,
+ Nor which the comeliest shows;
+ The timid, bashful violet,
+ Or the royal-hearted rose;
+
+ "The pansy in her purple dress,
+ The pink with cheek of red,
+ Or the faint, fair heliotrope who hangs,
+ Like a bashful maid, her head."
+
+ --_Phoebe Cary_
+
+
+Formerly when the furniture, pictures, and draperies had been
+arranged in our rooms, with perhaps a few pieces of bric-à-brac, we
+considered their decoration quite complete. But we have learned how
+much cheerfulness a few simple flowers, properly arranged, impart to
+the same rooms; and so flowers have come to be considered as almost
+essential to the complete decoration of the home.
+
+_A Lesson From the Japanese._--If we have learned much from the
+Japanese in regard to the arrangement and hanging of pictures, from
+them we have learned more about the artistic arrangement of flowers.
+They have taught us to value the stem and leaves of the flower as
+essential to an artistic arrangement, that flowers of the same kind
+should be grouped together, and that harmony and blending of colour are
+necessary to secure the most artistic effects.
+
+_Flowers of a Kind Grouped Together._--We may have been in the habit
+of putting several different kinds of flowers together and of being
+satisfied with such a composition; but the Japanese would tell us that
+when several different kinds of flowers are combined in one grouping
+the full beauty of each is lost; and after a few experiments we shall
+come to see the truth of this. Here is an illustration: At a summer
+camp with which I am familiar it was the daily duty of one of the
+younger boys to go for the wild flowers we used for keeping the camp
+gay. He often brought home snug little bunches of the flower of the
+wild convolvulus and the wild rose, to be used together. No pleasing
+arrangement could be made from such a handful, so he was asked to bring
+long pieces of the vine of the convolvulus and gather branches of the
+rose, especially those with the buds. The convolvulus we arranged in a
+flat dish at one end of a gray stone mantel, letting the vine hang over
+the mantel, and he quickly saw that it "looked prettier--more as though
+it were growing." When a few of the stalks of the wild rose were
+arranged by themselves in a green glass vase he pronounced them much
+"prettier than when mixed up with other flowers."
+
+_The Way of the Garden._--In our gardens we plant the sunshiny
+daffodils by themselves, the sweet peas grow in a mass together, and
+we have beds of roses. If we follow the same plan in the arrangement
+of our flowers indoors we shall realize their decorative qualities to
+the utmost. So we may consider it a safe rule to follow in arranging
+flowers,--to use only one kind of flower, with its stems and leaves,
+arranging them loosely, rather than to have many in a compact grouping.
+One single, long-stemmed rose, with its beautiful foliage, in a tall,
+slender glass is more decorative and gives us more pleasure than a
+dozen roses stripped of their foliage and crowded into a small vase.
+
+_Exceptions._--While the above rule should be generally followed, there
+are exceptional instances of the perfectly harmonious arrangement of
+flowers of two or more kinds together. Among these we may mention the
+combining of field daisies and buttercups, or buttercups with the
+grasses among which they grow. So, too, the lacy flower of the wild
+carrot may sometimes be effectively combined with some other flower.
+The spikes of the cardinal flower, for example, are gorgeous in colour,
+but very stiff and difficult to arrange; so the addition of a few
+sprays of the wild carrot softens the effect and makes it more pleasing.
+
+
+COLOUR ARRANGEMENT
+
+We have just considered the grouping of flowers by themselves. There is
+another element to be considered before we can have artistic results,
+and that is arrangement as to colour.
+
+_Colour Grouping._--We may not all be sensitive to colour ourselves,
+but in arranging flowers we should always keep in mind the pleasure
+that is to be given others, and so we wish nothing in our colour
+grouping that will offend those whose colour sense is keen. There are
+three colour schemes that can be followed with success and satisfaction
+to all. In one we group together only flowers of the same colour, as
+red roses, pink sweet peas, yellow iris, not red, pink, and white
+roses, nor all of the various colours of sweet pea.
+
+Another arrangement calls for shades and tints of the same colour. With
+many flowers it is possible to get exquisite effects by following this
+scheme. For instance, pansies ranging from a pale lavender to deep
+purple are lovely arranged in a low basket of damp moss. Sweet peas
+have beautiful shades of pink that can be combined, as well as shades
+of red and of lavender. Nasturtiums are never so effective as when
+the various shades of yellow, orange and brown are used together. The
+garden aster of to-day is another flower that affords much pleasure in
+colour arrangement; for it has lavenders and purples, a variety of pink
+tones, beautiful reds, and perfect white ones.
+
+And the white ones! What shall we do with these? Three or four pure
+white asters of the same variety may be used together; or two or three
+white ones may be grouped with a few lavender ones, or pink ones. White
+may be combined with any colour with good results. Nature is a good
+teacher here for she gives us both the coloured and the white in almost
+every variety of flower. For example there are crimson cosmos and white
+cosmos, scarlet geraniums and white geraniums, blue violets and white
+violets, and so on through a great many varieties.
+
+_Combination of Complementary Colours._--Another colour grouping
+that is sometimes desirable makes use of the complementary colours.
+The salpiglossis, a garden flower that ought to be better known than
+it is, gives us examples of these, with its blue and orange-yellow
+flowers that are so effective together. The iris also has flowers of
+complementary colours, yellow and violet blue being common among them.
+
+
+THE FLOWER HOLDERS
+
+_A Flower Composition as a Picture._--Having learned something
+about the artistic use of colour, we come to the consideration of
+the arrangement of the flowers, and this includes the vase or other
+receptacle used for holding them. An artistic flower composition is
+a picture; and as the mat and frame give finish to a picture hanging
+on the wall, so the vessel holding flowers should give the required
+finish to the flower picture. Like the frame, it should be simple in
+design, have graceful lines, and serve only as a medium to set off the
+flowers to the best advantage. There should be as little decoration as
+possible, and when jars or vases of colour are used they must blend or
+harmonize with the colour schemes of the flowers placed in them.
+
+_Receptacles for Flowers._--It often is a problem to find the most
+fitting thing for holding flowers; but in the reliable Japanese shops
+one can always find some simple holders, and there are very good
+designs in the clear and in the green glass that are inexpensive and
+appropriate. As a rule the less expensive the article the better
+adapted it is as a suitable holder for flowers. One need never mourn
+that she cannot afford cut glass vases for flowers, as they and their
+cheap imitations are among the most unsuitable of holders.
+
+_Four Typical Flower Holders._--Let us suppose our equipment includes
+four simple receptacles,--a small, clear glass fish globe such as may
+be had for twenty-five cents; a clear glass vase, about twelve inches
+in height, cylindrical in shape though flaring a little at the top,
+costing twenty-five cents; a large cylindrical Japanese jar of a pale
+green tint, eighteen inches in height and costing about one dollar and
+a quarter; and a deep green one, about eight inches in height, which
+may be bought for sixty or seventy cents.
+
+The fish globe is very effective when nasturtiums and their leaves are
+loosely arranged in it. The stems show through the water and glass
+and form a part of the composition. Short stemmed roses may be most
+artistically grouped in it. I have seen a very charming combination
+of mignonette and bachelor's buttons in the same bowl, as well as
+a harmonious picture in yellow, composed of the various shades of
+California poppies and their foliage.
+
+[Illustration: A fish globe with daisies]
+
+The tall glass sets off two or three long stemmed roses: and a few
+yellow daffodils or the narcissus with their leaves look equally well
+in it. Poppies for a day, in the same vase, have given pleasure to
+the beholder. At Easter it has joyously borne a stalk of two perfect
+lilies, and in the autumn tall spikes of salvia have been equally at
+home in it.
+
+Our tall Japanese jar is suited to larger arrangements, for we need
+to remember that in tall or vertical compositions the vase should be
+about one third the height of the whole combination; so this is adapted
+to holding branches of apple blossoms or mountain laurel; or, if one
+is fortunate enough to find tall lilac bushes, about three branches
+from these are effective in it. Tall-growing golden-rod looks equally
+well placed here. It furnishes a modest setting for dahlias and
+chrysanthemums, and one of its most decorative compositions has been
+two or three branches of pine bearing their brown cones.
+
+The possibilities of the smaller green jar are numerous, and only
+a few are given as suggestions. A loose arrangement of jonquils and
+their leaves, or of white narcissus, is effective. The shorter stemmed
+lilacs, either the purple ones or the white ones, may be placed in
+it. An arrangement of white field daisies, and one of yellow roses,
+have been found equally successful. One soon discovers the harmony and
+balance that exist between the flower and holder.
+
+[Illustration: A tall vase with narcissus]
+
+
+THE BACKGROUND
+
+_Space and Harmonious Surroundings._--To obtain the largest decorative
+effect we must have not only artistic grouping and harmonious setting
+of flowers, but space and background, just as are needed for the
+hanging of pictures. Many a floral composition has lost all decorative
+effect from being placed in too small a space and surrounded by
+distracting objects. A few days ago I stepped into a room on an errand
+and forgot my errand in the pleasure I derived from seeing some
+beautiful yellow chrysanthemums, three or four, I think, in a yellowish
+brown jar on a large mahogany table, having for a background the
+upturned leaf of the table. It stood some little distance from anything
+else, a shaft of sunlight lay across the whole, and as I looked at it
+I thought: Here is all that constitutes a decorative arrangement of
+flowers. It was the feature of the room that held one's attention.
+
+[Illustration: An arrangement for the tall Japanese jar]
+
+_Flowers for the Dining Table._--If we can have flowers in but one
+room in the house, it may be difficult to decide which one it shall
+be. Since it often happens that the dining-room is the only room where
+a busy family comes together for any length of time, flowers should
+certainly be introduced here that all may share their beauty and cheer.
+Any arrangement for the home table should be moderately low; and there
+are many simple flowers that can be used in this way to advantage. For
+instance, one can gather a quantity of the innocence or common bluet
+(root and all), to be found in any field in the spring, and put them in
+a shallow glass dish. Simple and effective decoration for the table is
+the result. Flowers with any degree of fragrance should never be used
+in the dining-room. The fragrance of some flowers is offensive to many
+people, and when combined with the odour of food doubly so.
+
+[Illustration: An arrangement of roses in a small jar]
+
+At a luncheon served by the girls in the model house the floral
+decoration for the table was a half dozen single, yellow jonquils
+with their foliage, placed in a creamy brown vase made by one of the
+girls. Their dishes being in white with a gold edge and the walls and
+furniture in browns, nothing could have been more harmonious than these
+few simple flowers.
+
+_Expensive Flowers not Necessary._--It is evident that for floral
+decoration neither expensive nor lavish displays are necessary, that
+simplicity is the thing to strive for, and that a few sprays of wild
+flowers in their season are more truly artistic than many expensive
+hot-house flowers. In this country we do not, as the Japanese do, make
+a festival in honour of certain flowers; but if we rightly appreciate
+and utilize the flowers of each season, we may give a touch of
+festivity to the life of every day.
+
+In the early spring nothing can be more appropriate than an arrangement
+of pussy willows or branches of the alder with its tassels, while the
+red maple when in flower gives a touch of colour that will brighten
+any room. A clump of blood root in a small jardiniere is as decorative
+as the expensive plants one may see in the home of some friend. The
+flowers of the field and the garden offer so many possibilities for
+decorative results that no one's home need lack the cheery touch which
+they can give.
+
+There is a personal element in flowers such as is not found in any
+other means of decoration, not even in pictures, with the single
+exception of good portraits. They seem to speak to us. We can almost
+believe that they feel an interest in all that we have said about them.
+If they really could know, would they not approve the principles that
+we have laid down? We may fancy that they _would_ approve and that, if
+they could really speak and we would listen, they would tell us so in
+some such language as the following:
+
+
+WHAT THE FLOWERS SAY ABOUT IT
+
+Don't mix us; we are exclusive and prefer our own kind.
+
+Don't make a confusion of colour with us.
+
+Don't arrange us in snug, solid masses.
+
+Don't neglect to use our stems and foliage as a part of the decoration.
+
+Don't tie us with ribbons, nor put paper-lace frills around us.
+
+Don't crowd us in with an assortment of household goods; we need space
+and a background.
+
+Don't arrange us in tall, stiff forms for the dining table.
+
+_Do_ love us and use us in the home as much as possible. This is well
+for you. By so doing not only will your love of us increase, but your
+artistic perception of the fitness of things will constantly enlarge.
+For truly has it been said, "The poorest woman in the world, if she has
+faith in beauty, will always be able to fill her home with light; she
+can always place there some flowers."
+
+
+
+
+V
+
+DECORATIVE FABRICS
+
+PORTIÈRES, WINDOW DRAPERIES, CUSHION COVERS, TABLE MATS
+
+ The very need of ornament arises out of a certain innate
+ discontent with plain, smooth surface--_Lewis F. Day_
+
+
+No kind of decorative art offers greater possibilities for touching
+the right--or the wrong--chord than that which makes use of fabrics.
+Portières, curtains, cushion covers, table runners and mats, lamp
+shades, and many other furnishings, in which fabrics are involved,
+present problems that quickly engage the interest of the amateur
+decorator who wishes to avoid the commonplace and, when well worked
+out, add greatly to the attractiveness of artistic surroundings. And
+every house becomes a studio for problems peculiar to itself, when the
+possibilities of development in this direction are realized. Here, as
+everywhere else, decorative art is secondary to architectural design
+and must never fail to acknowledge its dependence. Its glory is to
+follow. To attempt to lead means miserable failure.
+
+_Example of the Model House._--The wide doorways connecting the
+hall, the living room, and dining-room of our model house made doors
+undesirable and portieres necessary to assist in marking the division
+between the rooms and to soften the lines of the wood finish. They were
+made to harmonize with the colour scheme but were darker and richer
+in tone. The multiple windows, with the absence of direct sunshine,
+suggested the light style of drapery; and the preference given to
+straight-lined, substantial furniture, made in the school shops, led as
+a natural consequence to cushions and coverings of leather or coarse
+fabric, in order to bear out the idea of simplicity, directness, and
+durability in craftsmanship. Velvets and satins would have been out of
+place.
+
+_Utility to be Regarded._--The highly decorative function of such
+accessories makes it doubly necessary to exercise care in selecting
+materials, designing the ornamental features, and properly placing
+the completed article, in order that the requirements of use be
+not subordinated to the demands of art. It must never be forgotten
+that utility is the basis of all true decoration. Portieres were
+originally a substitute for doors--a means of closing an opening
+between rooms. It must be possible always for them easily to serve
+this purpose. Hence loops or rings, which slide easily over a pole,
+should be used. Portières may properly be made of heavy cloth and
+they may have a lining harmonizing or in pleasing contrast with the
+tone of the principal fabric. They should always be at least opaque.
+Window draperies, on the other hand, are not a substitute for shades
+or curtains. They should not shut out the light but soften it. They
+should, therefore, be made of light, washable, and durable material,
+and be hung so that they can be easily taken down for cleaning. The
+simplest style of hanging, by means of a brass rod and plain brackets,
+is the best. Since there is no need of frequently sliding them over
+the rod, it is well to hang them by means of a hem, stitched two or
+three inches from the top of the drapery, through which the rod may
+be easily pushed. Cushion covers and table runners, made of durable
+material and decorated with colours that are washable, are manifestly
+more serviceable than those that look fresh only when new, and hence
+are more in keeping with the idea of sincerity in household decoration.
+There is necessity for honesty in decoration as well as in plumbing if
+it is to meet the tests with equal success.
+
+[Illustration: Pillow Cover With Geometrical Designs Printed on Dyed
+Cotton Cloth. Table Runner of Russian Crash with Block Printed and
+Embroidered End Panels. Plate III]
+
+How such decorative features are worked out from beginning to end, is
+told in the following directions for a few practical problems which are
+known to be practical, because they have been actually carried through
+from the design to the completed article. This detailed and complete
+explanation, with the accompanying illustrations, will suggest many
+similar problems which every home offers.
+
+
+BLOCK PRINTING
+
+Problem: _Decorating a Table Runner_.--This problem is easily separated
+into four distinct parts--making the design, cutting the block,
+printing, and finishing. The materials needed are as follows:
+
+
+ (1) Making the design
+ Ordinary drawing paper
+ Rice paper
+ Charcoal
+ Pencil
+ Japanese or sable brush, medium size
+ Water-proof India ink
+
+ (2) Cutting the block
+ Gum wood
+ Small penknife
+ Vise
+ Sand-paper, fine
+
+ (3) Printing the design
+ Printing board
+ Sheet of glass
+ Oil paints
+ Turpentine
+ Palette knife
+ Cotton batting
+ Cheese cloth
+
+(4) Finishing the runner
+Embroidery silk or mercerized cotton
+
+[Illustration: The peacock design]
+
+_The Design._--To carry out the problem as illustrated, it is
+necessary, first of all, to make the design. Geometry, nature, and the
+imagination are satisfactory sources upon which to draw for the motif.
+If the inventive faculty is quite undeveloped, one should study for
+suggestions the figures in Oriental rugs, photographs of early Eastern
+art, and the fine old tapestries in museum collections. Some good
+geometrical designs, like that used on the pillow cover illustrated
+on page 104, were made by school-girls after drawing many figures
+found in rugs; and interesting bird patterns, after studying numerous
+reproductions of Coptic designs. In no case was the block pattern in
+the least like the designs studied. They served only as ideas to start
+with and led to the production of truly original work. It is essential
+to keep a few simple principles in mind in working out the design: (1)
+Both the dark and light shades in the patterns should be varied in
+size and form to avoid a monotonous result and should be as beautiful
+in proportion as possible. (2) There should be a centre of interest,
+one part of the design dominant--more attractive than any other. (3)
+The design must be a unit--_i. e._, the parts must hold together. All
+feeling of unity is lost if the parts of the design call attention to
+themselves to the exclusion of the whole.
+
+[Illustration: Block used in printing the peacock design]
+
+_Preliminary Sketches and the Drawing._--It will be found desirable to
+make many preliminary sketches in charcoal or soft pencil, rubbing in a
+part of each sketch with a tone in order to secure immediately the dark
+and light effect. These should be compared, keeping clearly in mind the
+principles stated above. When one possessing the right qualifications
+has been found, the next step is to draw on a fresh piece of paper an
+accurate 3-inch square and copy upon it the satisfactory design in
+pencil outline. This should be done very carefully, that the spirit
+of the original charcoal sketch may not be lost. When the drawing is
+completed it must be put into shape to be transferred to the block. To
+do this we fasten a piece of rice-paper over the drawing and trace with
+very light pencil lines, filling in the dark spaces with black ink,
+using a brush. This brush work may be done directly without the pencil
+line if the drawing underneath shows very plainly through the paper.
+When the ink has thoroughly dried, the design may be cut out on the
+edge of the 3-inch square.
+
+[Illustration: Bird pattern]
+
+_Laying the Pattern and Cutting the Block._--A block 3 × 3 × 7/8
+inches will now be required. This should be procured and sand-papered.
+One face of it should then be covered with a coating of library paste,
+the pattern laid upon it, and rubbed down smooth. If the design
+is symmetrical it should be pasted on the block, ink side up, but
+otherwise with the ink side down, or the design will be reversed upon
+the cloth. When the paste gets quite dry one may then fasten the block
+in the vise and, holding the blade of the knife at a slight angle and
+always away from the dark spots, proceed to cut the design along the
+outlines. These must be kept very smooth and sharp. All of the white
+shapes should be cut out, leaving the black ones in relief. Usually
+an eighth of an inch will be deep enough for the background, but it
+will be found after practise in printing that the larger spaces should
+be cut deeper and that, when the edges or corners of the block form
+a part of the background instead of the dark pattern, they also need
+a deeper cut. The paper that still adheres to the face of the block
+may now be removed by rubbing it upon a sheet of sand-paper laid upon
+something hard and smooth like glass in order that the block may have
+an absolutely level surface.
+
+[Illustration: A flower and leaf design]
+
+[Illustration: Block used in printing this design]
+
+_The Padded Board._--All block printing should be done upon a padded
+board. A very convenient one can be made by laying upon a bread board
+three or four sheets of blotting paper, and tacking over these several
+thicknesses of cheese cloth. In place of these an ironing board may be
+used.
+
+_Material Required._--It is essential to select for the runner a piece
+of crash of fine texture and even weave. This is sold under the name of
+Russian crash and is from 15 to 16 inches wide but varies considerably
+in quality. It is very difficult to print well upon the coarser grades.
+
+[Illustration: Alternating animal and geometrical design]
+
+[Illustration: Blocks used in printing this design]
+
+_Trying the Colours._--After deciding upon a colour which will
+harmonize with the general colour scheme of the room in which the
+table runner is to be used, it is in order to mix the paint and try
+the block upon a small piece of crash. To prepare the paint, squeeze
+a small quantity of the true colours chosen upon a sheet of glass and
+blend thoroughly with the palette knife, thinning with turpentine to
+the consistency of cream. It is seldom that a colour right from the
+tube will prove a pleasing one to use. Other colours mixed with it will
+change its hue and intensity; black or white will alter the value.
+Tie a little cotton batting up in a small square of cheese cloth or
+old handkerchief linen, being careful to remove from the raw edges
+all ravellings that might drop into the paint. Spread out quite thin
+upon the glass a small portion of the prepared paint and press the
+pad into it a number of times until it has absorbed all it will. Now
+charge the block by lightly pounding its surface with the pad. Press
+the block upon the cloth evenly. Only by repeated experiment will it
+be possible to determine just the right quantity of paint to mix, its
+brilliancy of tone, its consistency, how heavily to charge the block,
+etc. A good print shows the texture of the cloth through it, is even
+in tone, and has clear-cut edges. If the print looks like a painted
+spot, or if, when quite dry, you find it has stiffened the cloth, the
+paint used was too thick or else the block was too heavily charged.
+Different materials require different treatment. For a thin silk the
+block should be very lightly charged and lightly though evenly pressed
+upon the material. In printing upon crash it is necessary to press
+the block very firmly upon the material; and frequently, to insure
+getting a sufficiently strong impression, it is advisable to tap the
+block lightly with a hammer or wooden mallet. If one has a steady hand,
+the block can easily be lifted at one side to determine just where the
+extra pressure is needed. The block should be thoroughly rubbed with
+old cloth after each impression is made and occasionally sand-papered
+to remove any paint that may adhere to it. The first print made after
+sand-papering the block is liable to be a little less distinct than the
+others and should therefore be made upon an extra piece of the material.
+
+_Centring the Work._--A good way to plan the placing of the panel
+design is to run a basting thread across the crash between two of the
+woven threads. Mark the centre of the runner upon this thread, and,
+using these guides, print the design, beginning with one of the central
+units.
+
+_Additional Features._--Considerable charm can be added to the pattern
+by filling some of the spaces with a simple darning or running stitch
+in some bright colour. The embroidery thread used should be rather
+fine. It is well to finish the ends of the runner by button-holing with
+ravellings of the crash. Tiny dots of some colour used in the panel
+may be embroidered at intervals just above the button-holed edge.
+
+_Colours._--The following list of oil colours will be found practical:
+ivory black, flake white, burnt sienna, light red, crimson lake, chrome
+yellow, chrome green, permanent blue.
+
+_Materials._--Linen, cotton, soisette, all or part silk pongee, crêpe
+de chine, cheese cloth, and unbleached muslin are excellent materials
+for block printing. Beautiful background tones can be obtained by
+dyeing the two latter with easy dyes.
+
+In place of the gum wood for the block, basswood, maple, or holly may
+be used. It is possible to get along without a vise by fastening the
+block between two cleats nailed to an old table or heavy board. Success
+is sometimes achieved in cutting blocks while simply held in the hand.
+
+_Laundering._--If the material used for the foundation is washable,
+block printed articles can be satisfactorily and easily laundered in
+soapy, lukewarm water. The colours are not injured in the least. A
+liquid called stencil mordant is sometimes used in place of turpentine,
+insuring still greater permanency of colour.
+
+_Other Applications of Block Printing._--Other articles suitable for
+decoration by block printing are curtains, pillow covers, table covers,
+cushion covers, bureau scarfs, Portieres, table mats, bags of many
+sorts, etc. Printing may also be used to ornament articles for personal
+use, such as aprons and scarfs.
+
+
+STENCILLING
+
+Problem: _Window Draperies_.--Making the design, cutting the stencil,
+printing, and finishing form the divisions of the problem to be worked
+out. A list of necessary materials follows:
+
+ (1) Making the design
+ Charcoal
+ Pencil
+ Reflector
+ Ordinary drawing paper
+ Tracing paper
+ Carbon paper
+ Stencil paper
+
+ (2) Cutting the stencil
+ Sheet of glass
+ Sharp penknife
+
+ (3) Printing
+ Large board
+ Blotting paper
+ Turpentine
+ Oil paints
+ Bristle brushes
+ Pins
+
+_The Design._--Suggestions as to the method of procedure in making
+a design have been already given in the section on block printing.
+The principles of design to be considered are outlined there also.
+In working out this problem, however, several new things come up for
+explanation: (1) The difference between a design to be stenciled and
+one to be printed by means of a wood block; (2) the method of
+joining units to form a border; (3) the method of turning a corner in a
+border design.
+
+[Illustration: Window Draperies With Stenciled Border. Designed and
+Executed by a School Girl. Plate IV]
+
+_The Stencil Bands._--By studying the illustrations accompanying this
+section and by experimenting with the charcoal or soft pencil, it will
+be seen that in a stencil design the dark spots which stand for the
+color in the finished work are completely separated from one another by
+bands of varying widths.
+
+[Illustration: A stencilled pattern--portion of pillow cover]
+
+These bands, or bridges, as they are called, serve to hold the stencil
+together and are connected throughout the design. Though they may be as
+wide as one desires, it is seldom wise to make them much narrower than
+one eighth of an inch, as they are easily broken; and, unless carefully
+pinned down when stencilling, the paint is liable to run under them and
+ruin the work. In a block print design no connection of the light or
+separation of the dark parts has to be considered. In the illustration
+of the stencil observe that the dark and light are reversed as compared
+with the stencilled pattern--_i. e._, the dark represents the stencil
+paper, the light the openings through which the paint is applied.
+
+[Illustration: The stencil for this pattern]
+
+_The Complete Unit._--It will be readily understood that a border may
+be made up by repetition of one unit which is a complete thing in
+itself. The unit in such a case may be made very long and narrow, so
+that in repeating it along the vertical edge of a curtain it produces
+a narrow band, while along the horizontal edge the band is broad. A
+border worked out in this way, with perfectly straight and practically
+continuous margins, is very structural in character, emphasizing, as
+it does, the vertical and horizontal edges of the drapery. The effect
+is strong and dignified. The corner in this kind of border presents no
+difficulty.
+
+_The Subordinate Unit._--By studying the illustration in Plate IV it
+will be seen that the unit of the border in this case is not complete
+in itself, but that the very conventional flower and stem composing it
+are joined to the next unit by what might be called a subordinate unit,
+composed, in this case, of a leaf form. The units are so closely spaced
+that a structural effect is fairly well obtained--_i. e._, the upper
+and lower edges of the border are nearly straight, giving a feeling of
+restfulness to the design that never accompanies one with broken or
+wavy edges.
+
+_Designing the Corner._--Having planned a design for the straight
+running border of the curtains, take a reflector and experiment with
+the corner. The reflector can easily be made by cutting from an old
+discarded looking-glass a small rectangular piece, 3-1/2 by 6 inches
+being a convenient size. The edges should be very straight and the
+corners square. Hold the reflector at various points along the border
+and always at an angle of 45 degrees. Study these possible corners
+which will be reflected in the glass, and when one sufficiently strong
+and interesting is found draw a light line along the edge of the
+reflector. This line, of course, exactly bisects the corner of the
+border to be made. Avoid making a border of this kind too deep or, when
+turned for the vertical edges, it will form a very broad and heavy band.
+
+_The Outline Drawing._--The dark and light design having thus been
+worked out in charcoal, the next thing to do is to make a very careful
+pencil-outline drawing of the same. It is well to draw the corner
+and one unit free-hand and trace the rest. To do the tracing, pin a
+piece of very thin paper over the finished part, and trace with a well
+sharpened and fairly soft pencil. Turn the tracing paper upside down,
+fitting a part of the tracing to the drawing underneath. After tacking
+it down, trace the remainder, using a firm, even pressure and being
+careful exactly to follow the line. Strengthen the part of the pattern
+thus transferred by going over it with a sharp, hard point, and
+continue as before until you have a border of which both the vertical
+and horizontal sections are from 9 to 12 inches long.
+
+_Transfer to Stencil Paper._--Now, take a piece of stencil paper and
+square up one corner. Fasten the pencil drawing securely to the stencil
+paper along one edge, slip a piece of carbon paper between the two, and
+trace the design.
+
+_Cutting the Stencil._--Before cutting the stencil for the curtain
+a beginner should do a little practising upon an extra piece of the
+paper. Trace a portion of the design upon this piece, lay it upon a
+sheet of glass or very hard wood, and with a sharp penknife cut along
+the outline of the pattern. The knife should be held at a slight angle
+and the cut made completely through the paper. The pieces of stencil
+paper should never be pulled out but will fall out without aid when the
+cutting is completed. After a little practice it will be found a simple
+matter to cut the design with perfectly smooth edges.
+
+_Suitable Materials for Stencilling._--For the curtains fine cheese
+cloth or batiste will be found excellent. Even unbleached muslin will
+make attractive curtains where expense must be carefully considered.
+Unless the woodwork of the room is white, the pure white materials
+will be found less pleasing than those that are quite creamy in tone.
+Scrim in a charming, grayish tan colour is obtainable, and, if of good,
+soft quality, makes most satisfactory curtains. It is not advisable to
+hemstitch this material before stencilling as in case of accident or
+failure so much work is lost; but the hems should be carefully planned
+and basted, those along the inner edges of the curtains being narrower
+than the bottom hems.
+
+_The Colours._--The color scheme of the room should be carefully
+considered in deciding upon the colour or colours to be used in
+stencilling. If two colours are chosen, they should be of the same
+value--_i. e._, the two colours should form equally dark spots in order
+that the pattern of the border may appear in the same dark and light as
+the original charcoal sketch.
+
+_Pinning the Stencil._--When ready for the actual process of
+stencilling, lay a large sheet of blotting paper upon a board and over
+this place the corner of the curtain. Pin the stencil securely to the
+curtain so that the edge of the border when printed shall be about
+half an inch from the hem and the edges of both shall be absolutely
+parallel. Use as few pins as possible but enough to keep the stencil
+close to the cloth.
+
+_Testing the Paint._--Having mixed the oil paint with turpentine or
+stencil mordant, using an old cup or glass for each colour, practise
+stencilling upon a small piece of cloth. Put blotting-paper under
+the cloth and pin the stencil down with great care. Use short, stiff
+bristle brushes for the stencilling, one for each colour. Remove almost
+all the paint from the brush by pressing it upon blotting-paper. When
+it leaves scarcely a mark, proceed to stencil the pattern by pounding
+the brush upon the exposed portions of the cloth, working close to
+the edge of each spot. If, upon removing the stencil, the edges are
+blurred, the paint was too thin or the stencil not carefully pinned
+down. If, on the other hand, the coloured spots look thick and painty,
+so that upon drying, the cloth is found stiffened in these places, you
+may be sure that the paint used was too thick or that the brush was too
+wet. The secret of good stencilling is to use the paint as thin and the
+brush as dry as possible. Hold the stencilled sample up to the window
+and see whether, when the light shines through it, the colour appears
+right.
+
+_The Real Process._--When confident that the process is understood
+and that the colour is satisfactory, proceed to stencil the corner of
+the curtain. Always have at hand a bottle of turpentine and a clean
+piece of cloth to use in case of accident. When removing the pins from
+the stencil wipe each one carefully. Clean the stencil, too, handling
+it with care that none of the slender bridges may be broken. Replace
+the stencil, fitting a section of it to the finished work. Put the
+pins in the holes already made, otherwise the paint will get into
+them and disfigure the work. Continue the stencilling, a section at a
+time, until the border is completed. Do not fold the curtains until
+the stencilling is thoroughly dry. If the threads of the material can
+be easily pulled, a hemstitched edge will make the best finish; but
+careful hand hemming will look well upon material like fine batiste.
+
+_The Valance._--The curtains should hang in vertical folds from the top
+of the window to a point slightly below the window sill. They should be
+drawn back at each side of the window and the space between at the top
+filled by a valance about a foot deep, perhaps deeper if the window is
+very high. This valance should have the border stencilled upon it and
+should be tacked just underneath the edge of the curtains. Sometimes,
+as in the illustration in Plate IV, a valance running across
+the entire width of the window is used. In this case it is run upon an
+extra rod in front of the one from which the curtain hangs. Double
+rods for this purpose can be bought.
+
+_Other Possible Problems._--As stencilling can be employed in
+practically the same place and upon the same materials as block
+printing, it is only necessary to refer to the lists given at the
+end of that section of this chapter for suggestions as to further
+possibilities in the way of home decoration by stencilling.
+
+
+EMBROIDERY
+
+Problem: _Table Mat_.--As in the preceding problems, the first thing to
+do is to plan the design roughly in charcoal or soft pencil in order
+to get the dark and light relations and the best proportions possible.
+If convenient, the mat should be made for use with some special lamp
+or vase. By measuring the base of this object it is easy to determine
+the size of the plain central space, which may be either circular or
+square in shape. The forms in the decorated part may be made of various
+shapes, but it is well to keep them very simple in outline. Straight
+lines alone may be employed, as in the mats illustrated in Plate V,
+or a combination of straight and curved lines, as in the one shown in
+Plate III. After working out the design very accurately with a
+hard pencil, the next thing in order is to transfer it to a piece of
+coarse Russian crash or heavy linen by means of carbon paper, taking
+great care to get the straight edges of the design even with the
+threads of the crash.
+
+_Desirable Combinations of Colour and Stitches._--The simple running
+or darning stitch should be employed in embroidering the pattern.
+Two or more colours may be used. Darning in dull green and outlining
+with black in the same stitch makes a very attractive mat. Other good
+combinations are green and white, blue and white, blue and green, soft
+dull blue, and pinkish orange. This by no means exhausts the pleasing
+contrasts that may be found. The brighter colour should always be
+employed in the smaller quantities. The mat illustrated in Plate V was
+embroidered in dull green and red mercerized cotton. After the darning
+was completed it was found that the red used in the small circles alone
+was too conspicuous, although it was very dull in tone. This defect
+was completely remedied and a perfect unity given to the design by
+outlining the forms in a couching stitch, using both colours. This was
+done by laying a green thread along the edge of each spot and taking a
+stitch of red over it at equal intervals.
+
+[Illustration: CROCHETED PANELS
+
+A Linen Workbag With Conventional Landscape in Darning Stitch
+
+A Crash Table Mat Embroidered in Darning and Couching Stitch
+
+Designed and Executed by School Girls. Plate V]
+
+After the embroidered pattern is done one may finish the mat with fine,
+close hemstitching or by button-holing the edge with ravellings of the
+crash. The latter method is usually more pleasing. The simple darning
+stitch can also be used to make very attractive borders for table
+runners, sofa pillows, decorations for work bags, as illustrated in
+Plate V, besides being used to enrich a great variety of block printed
+or stencilled articles.
+
+_The Satin Stitch._--Another effective and easy embroidery stitch to be
+used in decorating articles for the home is the over-and-over or satin
+stitch. When planning to use this stitch upon coarse linen in which
+the threads can be easily counted, transfer the design, after having
+carefully drawn it in pencil outline, to paper marked off into little
+squares. This can be bought where kindergarten supplies are sold.
+Redraw the outline of the design, following exactly the lines on the
+paper, and at the same time keep as close as possible to the original
+form. Let a certain number of threads of linen represent a square of
+the design and copy the pattern in the satin stitch or even the cross
+stitch if preferred. No transferring of the pattern to the cloth is
+necessary.
+
+A pattern worked out on cross section paper in this way can also be
+crocheted, as illustrated in Plate V, and set into linen or some of its
+many imitations to decorate numberless articles for home or personal
+adornment. This crocheted work, if evenly done in fine thread, is quite
+suggestive of the Italian filet lace.
+
+
+
+
+VI
+
+DRESS AND THE PRINCIPLES OF DECORATION
+
+ "A foolish little maiden had a foolish little bonnet
+ With a feather and a ribbon and a bit of lace upon it;
+ And that the other maidens of the little town might know it,
+ She thought she'd go to meeting of a Sunday just to show it.
+
+ 'Hallelujah! hallelujah!' sang the choir above her head.
+ 'Hardly knew you! hardly knew you!' were the words she
+ thought they said."
+
+
+In considering the dress of the person as related to home decoration
+one is not so far afield as one may seem to be at first thought. It
+is true that dress has a variety of functions to perform that have no
+connection with the subject of decoration; and yet there is much that
+is common to both. Well-dressed people of whatever age or sex, in the
+design and general make-up of their costumes, must observe the same
+laws that govern design wherever it is applied, as an expression of
+the artistic sense in the affairs of every-day life. Beauty of line
+and proportion, harmony of colour, adaptation to use and to a great
+variety of special conditions, simplicity, symmetry, restraint, are all
+involved in personal attire, as they are in the decoration of a room;
+and in most cases success or failure in one field has its counterpart
+in the other. Have we not often remarked of a house or of a room
+that it looks "just like her" or perhaps "just like him"; and do not
+attractive costumes give pleasure to others than those who wear them
+for the same reasons that properly decorated and well-arranged rooms
+afford similar enjoyment to those who live in them?
+
+_Art and the Fashions._--In discussing the parallel between art
+in clothing and the more stable art of home decoration it must be
+admitted, of course, that style in dress introduces some embarrassing
+questions; for the styles, especially for women, suffer wonderful
+changes with every season. And yet people of artistic feeling and good
+taste, succeed in maintaining a fair degree of harmony between the
+changing demands of fashion and the established principles of art as
+applied in dress.
+
+_How to Be Well Dressed._--The well-dressed woman knows how to select
+her clothes and how to wear them. She must study her own figure and
+know her defects as well as her good points. With this knowledge she
+can learn to subdue the one and bring out the other. She should have a
+clear conception of the ideal figure and strive to adapt herself to
+it. To acquire this training the principles of the art of decoration
+must be understood and applied. She should never wear a garment of a
+certain style simply because it is the fashion, but strive to make it
+conform to her individual type.
+
+_Good Lines._--Decorative design in dress must follow the construction
+lines of the figure and not destroy them. These are the much discussed
+good lines of which we hear and read so much. Horizontal lines break
+the figure and increase the breadth, while vertical lines give the
+appearance of height. It is the simple lines, conforming to and
+following the lines of the ideal figure, which are the best. The
+taste of most women leads them to desire simple clothes; but through
+ignorance or inexperience many of these women fail to achieve that aim.
+A stout woman with a round back is sometimes seen wearing a dress with
+lapels or ruffles over the shoulders. This only serves to accentuate
+her defect.
+
+_Unity and Harmony._--In all forms of decoration harmony is
+essential--_i. e._, all the parts that are to be combined must agree
+with one another and with their surroundings. To secure this in dress
+is to give unity to the entire costume. A dress hat with plumes should
+not be worn with a tailored suit in the morning; and yet we often see
+such a combination. Here the lack of harmony is between the parts of
+the costume; but the entire costume must be suited to the peculiarities
+of figure. There are women who never look well in the straight lines
+of a tailored suit: the severity is not becoming to them. They must
+tone down the effects of the lines by ruchings, ruffles, a soft stock,
+or some such softening elements of dress. Others do not look well in
+fluffy things. Each must know what is becoming and dress accordingly.
+
+_Importance of Colours._--Every season we hear that certain colours
+are to be worn. Many women will choose a colour because they like it
+without considering whether it is suitable for them to wear. A little
+attention to a few well-known facts will help them to avoid failures
+of this kind. It is generally recognized that light colours seem to
+increase the size. Striped materials should not be worn by the stout
+women unless the stripes are very indistinct. Dots are also very
+dangerous for her; but she may choose a pattern with pin-point dots
+scattered over the surface at some distance from each other. She is
+always safe in a plain, dark colour.
+
+_Colour and Complexion._--In deciding on a becoming colour one must
+take into account the colour of the hair and eyes and the tone of
+the complexion. It has been thought that young girls can wear clear,
+light shades and that older women should keep to dark, quiet colours;
+yet there are older women who wear pale gray, mauve, and lavender
+charmingly and many young girls who cannot wear blue or pink. It is
+quite impossible to make accurate colour rules, because it would be
+hard to find two complexions that require exactly the same colour
+setting. It is well, however, to study combinations of different
+colours with the idea of finding the right colour, to use in any
+costume, the amount of each, and the best arrangement to give a proper
+balance.
+
+_Proportion._--The importance of the principle of proportion is often
+overlooked, but beauty of dress is never possible if it be neglected. A
+well-dressed woman, in selecting her hat, must have given consideration
+to the relation of the size and shape of the head to the lines of the
+entire figure. Strictly speaking, a hat is a covering for the head,
+and it should seem to belong to the head, to protect it, and, through
+harmony of colour and proportion of line and mass, to improve the
+appearance of the whole costume. The artist, when drawing a figure,
+uses the head as the unit of measure. Therefore in choosing a hat
+one should select a style that is in good proportion to the size of
+the head and to the height of the figure. If the mass of the head is
+increased disproportionately by too large a hat, the entire figure is
+apparently shortened and the natural proportions destroyed. One often
+wonders why photographs of people with hats on look so old-fashioned
+and sometimes so ridiculous. It is because the hat is not in good
+proportion. The Gainsborough and Reynolds ladies with hats never look
+queer. Their hats bear the right relation to the head and the figure.
+
+_Appropriateness._--The general proportions of a hat or a gown may
+be good, but the addition of the decoration may destroy all the good
+effect obtained by securing the right relation of line and mass. The
+aim of all decoration should be to harmonize and strengthen the whole.
+Beauty of dress, therefore, depends upon simplicity and appropriateness
+of the material used as well as upon the form and arrangement of the
+material. Wherever ornament is used it must fulfil the condition of
+fitness to place; otherwise it is not really decorative. In trimming a
+hat, the one who is to wear it should take her seat before a mirror,
+and place the hat comfortably upon her head; then with the aid of a
+hand glass she should try the trimming in different positions until
+the best effect is obtained.
+
+The designs in trimming should be appropriate to the garment. The size
+of the design and the kind of form used should be considered. Simple
+forms are the best for all decorative art work. In fact, there is great
+advantage in plain materials. They always work to greater economy than
+stripes or plaids.
+
+_Influence of Occupation._--The well-dressed woman should realize how
+great is the influence of occasion and occupation. Some gowns were
+intended only for afternoon wear in the house; but we often see them
+worn on the street cars or for shopping. I have always approved of the
+rule in many shops which requires the clerks to wear plain black gowns.
+Formerly it was the old finery which was used for every-day wear. Now
+the business woman to be successful has to exercise more thought upon
+her clothes than the woman at home. Her clothes have harder wear and
+must be appropriate for her work.
+
+The dress of school-girls and children must not be overlooked. It
+should be as simple as possible and above all else it should be
+comfortable. It should never bind or pinch; indeed, the clothing should
+not interfere with any function of the body. But we often see children
+dressed with much lace, with many ruffles, and even with jewellery;
+and we have seen school girls wearing net waists, plumed hats, and
+high-heeled shoes. What an infraction is this of the principle of
+appropriateness in dress!
+
+
+
+
+VII
+
+FURNITURE MAKING
+
+ It is only by labour that thought can be made healthy, and only by
+ thought that labour can be made happy--_John Ruskin_
+
+
+The chief purpose of this chapter is to outline the most important
+general facts upon which good furniture making is based and to give
+specific directions for working out a number of typical problems,
+following designs which have been proved in completed articles made,
+for the most part, by school-boys and tested by use. No attempt is made
+to give this great subject complete and systematic treatment; for this
+would involve many problems in constructive design and a corresponding
+number of working drawings, with specifications for the selection and
+preparation of materials and for the work of construction--a subject so
+extensive that it would easily overrun the limits of a single chapter.
+The aim is rather to select a few of the most suggestive lessons of
+experience in constructive work with special reference to our main
+subject of household decoration.
+
+It is taken for granted that the interested reader is familiar with
+the use of the common hand tools for woodworking or that he can, with
+some assistance, perhaps, easily command their use. It is not thought
+necessary, therefore, to describe in detail the proper method of using
+tools, but rather to offer practical suggestions on the selection,
+preparation and constructive use of woodworking materials and, in the
+series of problems which follow, to give some helpful hints on the way
+woodworking tools should be used. It is also assumed that in most cases
+the very great advantage of woodworking machinery may be utilized,
+especially in preparing the materials and bringing them within easy
+reach of the hand-tool processes. The true art-craft spirit, which
+always honours handwork as the supreme method, may not hesitate
+to command the services of machines so long as it does not become
+slavishly dependent upon them.
+
+
+SELECTION AND PREPARATION OF STOCK
+
+The first thing that should claim the attention of the artistic
+woodworker is the selection and preparation of his materials, commonly
+known as the stock. The sculptor selects his marbles with the
+greatest care. So should the cabinet-maker make sure that his woods
+are taken from the right parts of selected timber and that they are
+properly sawed and well seasoned. The importance of this cannot be
+overestimated. Hard wood boards, cut from the sides of a tree, will in
+drying, invariably curve across their grain. It is only those that are
+cut from the centre to the outside of the tree that may be depended
+upon to remain approximately true; for, after this cutting, the grain
+runs directly through the thickness of the board, or nearly so. Boards
+taken from timber in this way are said to be "quarter sawed"; those cut
+by sawing through the logs from side to side, as is always done with
+soft woods and often with hard woods, are said to be "plain sawed."
+This is illustrated in the accompanying drawings.
+
+_Quartered Oak._--In the case of oak, the quarter sawing not only
+maintains a flat surface but greatly improves the appearance of the
+stock when finished. The popularity of quartered oak for furniture may
+therefore be said to be well founded, for it is the sincerest of woods.
+It is as good as it looks.
+
+[Illustration: Quarter sawed log]
+
+Quarter sawing, however, is very largely confined to oak because the
+appearance of the grain and the strength of most woods is far from
+being improved by this method of cutting. Thus ash and gum wood and all
+the softer woods sometimes used in furniture making are plain sawed.
+We shall, therefore, generally find stock from these woods curved and
+twisted badly so that it will be necessary, in selecting material for
+large surfaces such as table tops, to pick out the straight parts for
+these surfaces and save the remainder to be cut into the smaller pieces
+which will always be needed. These pieces can be easily planed without
+much loss of thickness.
+
+[Illustration: End of quarter sawed board]
+
+[Illustration: Plain sawed log]
+
+[Illustration: End of plain sawed board]
+
+_Kiln-dried Lumber._--This bending and twisting of the boards does not
+take place as soon as they are sawed out of the log, but gradually
+during the process of seasoning; and, unless the lumber is kiln-dried,
+the more gradual the seasoning the less the bending. Lumber is
+kiln-dried by stacking it, with air spaces left between the boards, in
+steam-heated closets or kilns, where the process of drying is carried
+on evenly though rapidly. Kiln-dried lumber, therefore, retains its
+shape quite as well as that which is dried slowly in the lumber pile.
+But whether kiln-dried or not, it should be allowed to remain in a
+dry place as long as possible before using it so that it will have a
+chance to change all that it is likely to and so lessen the subsequent
+shrinking and warping. A good cabinet-maker never undertakes to make
+furniture from stock that he does not know to be perfectly dry and well
+seasoned, not only because unseasoned lumber is more likely to shrink,
+warp, and crack, but also because it cannot be depended upon to hold
+the glue, take varnish well, or respond readily to other methods of
+finishing.
+
+_Planing Down to a Flat Surface._--Since boards are seldom perfectly
+flat, even if one has taken the greatest pains to select well-seasoned
+stock, it will almost invariably be necessary to work them down to a
+plane surface when they are glued up or joined together in any way.
+To accomplish this result it is necessary to plan the arrangement of
+the pieces in such a way that the concave of the bend shall fall on
+the same side, as shown in the illustration, and thus provide for the
+final working down with the least possible removal of stock. They can
+be arranged on a level bench top or floor with the convex side down so
+that they will lie as flat as possible. The boards should then be taken
+out one by one and their edges should be carefully planed so that they
+will match together in the position in which they are laid. It will
+be necessary to take each board from its place and return it several
+times in order that this matching may be made as perfect as possible.
+The object of all this is to prevent the entire arrangement from
+springing--_i. e._, from acquiring any new bend or twist when the parts
+are glued up. In joining boards to form large pieces of glued-up work,
+like table tops, it is customary to strengthen the joints by means of
+dowel pins. Small table tops and similar work may be safely glued up
+without dowelling.
+
+[Illustration: Boards placed for planing to flat surfaces]
+
+_Fastening Glued-up Work._ It will be readily understood upon a little
+reflection that all plain glued-up work should be allowed to move
+slightly upon the framework to which it is attached; for even after it
+is well seasoned and well finished all woods will swell slightly in a
+damp atmosphere and shrink slightly when the air is dry, the greatest
+movement being across the grain. Solid table tops, therefore, should
+never be fastened down firmly upon the framework with glue or with
+screws, but should be secured by means of buttons screwed to the under
+side of the top which travel in grooves cut in the framework and thus
+allow for expansion and contraction. A drawing is shown to illustrate
+the method of attaching the table-top buttons. Much of the warping and
+splitting of furniture is due to the failure of the designer or maker
+to observe this precaution.
+
+[Illustration: Method of fastening table tops]
+
+In planing up stock, whether it be a single piece or several glued
+together as just described, the cabinet-maker planes off one side first
+and then, using this side as the working face, gauges to the required
+thickness and planes off the other side if necessary. If the work be
+upon glued-up stock, it is well to plane off the projecting edges of
+the concave sides first, as that is generally somewhat easier and may
+be all the planing that will be necessary. If it be single pieces of
+stock that need to be planed up, the natural twist or "wind" is first
+planed out to a flat working face on one side before putting the plane
+to the opposite side.
+
+_The Surface Plate._--Planing to a flat surface requires some device
+to guide the eye. If the surface be very uneven at first, a beginning
+may be made in the planing without much assistance; but a point
+will finally be reached when neither the unaided eye nor the hand
+can determine whether or not a surface is flat. To determine this a
+surface plate, as it is called, is needed. This consists of a block of
+cast-iron, thick enough to prevent it from being bent--_i. e._, an inch
+or more--and with a somewhat rough but perfectly flat surface on one
+side. This surface is well chalked over. When the wood surface which is
+being planed down is laid upon this chalked surface and slightly moved
+it is readily seen that the highest places on the wood will become
+marked with the chalk and so indicate to the cabinet-maker what parts
+are to be removed. By making several tests of this kind he is able to
+plane to a good flat surface.
+
+[Illustration: Winding sticks]
+
+_Winding Sticks._--If the amateur's workshop is not provided with
+a surface plate, a simple means of testing for a flat surface is
+by means of two narrow straight edges or "winding" sticks, placing
+them on their narrow edges across each end of the piece, as shown in
+the illustration, and sighting across their upper edges. The slight
+projections in the surfaces of the board can be determined in this way
+and planed off until the two top edges of the sticks are found to be
+level. These winding sticks are simply wooden strips, accurately made,
+with opposite faces parallel. Their dimensions may be 1 × 2-1/2 × 30
+inches.
+
+_Importance of True Surfaces._--It may be well to add that all this
+care to produce flat and parallel surfaces is not merely for the
+purpose of giving a good appearance to these surfaces. True surfaces
+are necessary for the good of the work as a whole, for they form the
+basis from which other surfaces are gauged and other parts "trued
+up"--_i. e._, made square or otherwise geometrically correct. When the
+main surfaces of a piece of cabinet work are properly shaped, all the
+framework and other parts may be brought into line without bending
+or twisting. All such strains should be religiously avoided in good
+cabinet work. The natural curves, twists, or projections of the stock
+used should be removed by the use of the proper tools and never be
+strained to force any of the parts into their proper places or shapes.
+Such efforts produce strains which are transmitted to other parts,
+displacing them, causing new defects or a general failure of the parts
+to support each other.
+
+_A Systematic Plan of Work._--When the cabinet-maker undertakes to make
+either a single piece of furniture or several pieces, he goes about
+it in a very systematic way. Consulting his working drawing he makes
+an accurate list of the different pieces that will be required. For
+example, if he is to make a Morris chair he notes the fact that he will
+need four legs or posts 2-1/2 inches square by 22-3/4 inches long, a
+front rail and a back rail each 7/8 × 2-1/4 × 22 inches, two side rails
+7/8 × 2-1/4 × 24 inches, and so on until the list of necessary parts is
+completed. With this list in hand he makes a careful selection of the
+lumber and prepares the pieces in the rough, allowing economically for
+the necessary working waste. Economy of time and labour is also secured
+by keeping together all parts on which similar work is to be done.
+Thus, if several parts are to be sawed to the same width or fashioned
+to the same curves, it is generally the best plan to work these parts
+out together while the machines and tools are set for this purpose.
+Such a plan not only saves time but, partially at least, it obviates
+the danger of mistakes. It is important also to follow a systematic
+order of work. All sawing to rough dimensions should be done before the
+pieces are dressed to drawing dimensions, and the latter operations
+should generally all be completed before laying out and cutting the
+joints. As the work progresses toward completion great saving of time
+and much comfort will result from keeping the completed parts in good
+condition and so arranged that they can be easily assembled.
+
+
+GLUING
+
+_Necessity of Good Joints._--After the selection and preparation of the
+material for the stock, the next important general process that demands
+attention is gluing; for good cabinet work implies good glue and a
+knowledge of how to use it. Prepared glue, such as is sold in bottles,
+is unsatisfactory for work of any consequence. A good woodworker
+always has his own glue pot and sees to it that it may be made ready
+for use on short notice. The glue should be fresh, thin, and hot. It
+should be applied quickly in a warm room and the parts to which it is
+applied clamped up quickly before the glue chills. It is the glue which
+penetrates the wood that holds the parts together and not a layer of
+glue between the joined edges or surfaces. It is therefore evident not
+only that joints and surfaces should be well smeared with glue, hot
+and thin enough to be quickly absorbed, but also that the parts should
+be clamped up quickly while the glue is still hot so as to prevent any
+surplus from remaining in the joint. This is an additional reason for
+making close fits in all joints--in those which are to be glued up as
+well as in those which are not. It is a common fault of beginners to
+be satisfied with loose mortise and tenon joints, counting upon the
+glue to fill up the spaces. Much of the furniture found in the markets
+falls to pieces for the same reason. Such work should never be allowed
+to pass. It is based upon an entirely mistaken notion of the true
+office of glue and is nothing more nor less than a falsehood in wood.
+
+[Illustration: Method of holding framing parts square while glue is
+setting]
+
+_Systematic Methods Required._--As in the preparation of stock and
+working it up, so in gluing, system is all important. The hand screws
+or clamps should be made ready and adjusted to the required width so
+that they may be quickly placed in position as soon as the glue is
+applied. The whole process must be managed as quickly as possible
+because the joints must be tested before the glue has had time to
+set. A carpenter's large square should be used for testing the right
+angles, since it is more reliable than the small try squares. It will
+frequently be found necessary to hold framing pieces square while the
+glue is hardening. This can easily be done by nailing small strips
+of waste stock across the parts, as shown in the drawing. A beginner
+should be cautioned not to attempt to glue up too many joints at one
+time. Two opposite corners of a framing piece should be glued up
+separately and left to set before the attempt is made to glue the whole
+rectangle together. The two remaining joints, however, should be glued
+and clamped together at the same time.
+
+
+PICTURE FRAMING
+
+_Inexpensive Framing Stock._--Picture-frame stock can be easily
+obtained of dealers in artists' supplies and in furniture stores in a
+great variety of styles. Much of it is so well prepared and so nicely
+finished that it leaves little to be desired. It is, therefore, often
+best to secure the stock for frames in this way. It is, however,
+somewhat expensive, so that, when economy is important, it behooves the
+young woodworker to prepare his own framing stock.
+
+Very satisfactory frames 2 inches in width or less may be made from
+matched oak flooring, a section of which is here illustrated, by
+planing off the tongue and cutting away one side of the groove to
+furnish the inset for the glass. Wider flat frames of any thickness
+can, of course, be cut out from the ordinary stock. A special tool
+for cutting the inset is desirable but not necessary. A 1/4-inch
+saw cut may be made with a circular saw or even with a hand saw and
+the necessary removal of the wood accomplished by means of careful
+chiselling.
+
+[Illustration: Picture framing stock made from oak flooring]
+
+[Illustration: The mitre joint]
+
+_Mitres._--Frames may be joined at the corners in various ways. A
+common way is by the mitre joint illustrated in the drawing. To secure
+good joints of this kind it is necessary that the mitres be cut on an
+angle of exactly 45 degrees and that the pieces for the corresponding
+sides of the frame be precisely of the same length. Hand sawing is
+generally not exact enough to produce angles of sufficient accuracy
+even when an ordinary mitre box is used. Hand-sawed mitres, therefore,
+will require a little truing with a small plane. Great care must be
+exercised also in fitting the corners together. The common bench
+square is not large enough to prove the work. A better way is to lay a
+carpenter's framing square on the bench and fit the two pieces of the
+frame against the sides of the square, testing each corner in that way.
+
+[Illustration: Clamping mitre joints]
+
+_Gluing the Joints._--If the corners are unusually well fitted, a
+good joint can be made by first sizing the ends with glue and then
+firmly pressing the pieces together upon a true surface, leaving them
+undisturbed for four or five hours until the glue is hard. By sizing
+the ends of the joints is meant thoroughly filling the end pores with
+glue, rubbing it into the pores with another block. Generally speaking,
+however, it is necessary to make use of a mitre-clamping device. If
+a special clamping device is not available, one can be easily made
+by gluing small soft wood blocks to the parts of the frame near the
+corners, as shown in the accompanying drawing. In a half hour or so
+these blocks will become firmly set so that the mitre joints may
+be glued together, clamping them up with a hand screw. As already
+explained under the general directions on gluing, it is good practice
+for a beginner to glue up opposite corners and not attempt to glue up
+the two remaining corners until the first two are well set. When the
+first two corners are well set they should be nailed; and before the
+two remaining corners are glued it is well to try the parts together
+to see if they do not require a little correcting before gluing. These
+joints also should have light nailing after the glue has been set. In
+nailing, small holes should be made with a brad awl or drill in order
+to avoid splitting the corners, and long finishing nails should be used.
+
+_The Defect of Shrinking._--With proper tools the mitre joint is the
+easiest one to make, but it has one unavoidable defect, especially
+in wide frames. It is very difficult to get stock well seasoned and
+almost impossible to get it perfectly seasoned, so that wide frames,
+however well finished, must be expected to shrink a little after they
+are joined together. As most of this shrinking is across the width of
+the stock it is evident that it will tend to open the mitre joints on
+the inside of the corners. This is what happens almost invariably with
+joints made in this way from wide stock in picture framing. The same
+defect is also frequently observed in the interior finishing around
+windows and doors.
+
+There are three other methods of joining the corners of picture
+frames--_viz._, the halved lap joint, the mortise and tenon joint, and
+the dowelled joint. A drawing is shown to illustrate these three kinds
+of corner joints, and it is hardly necessary to say that no one of
+them is open to the same objection that attaches to the mitre joint.
+All these joints require accurate cutting and rather more of it than
+the mitre joint requires, but they are more easily glued up. The halved
+lap joint is easily clamped up with a common hand screw, even when the
+frame is a very large one. But the other two require long clamps in
+order to pull the joints up well.
+
+[Illustration: Halved lap joint]
+
+[Illustration: Mortise and tenon joint]
+
+_Character of the Frame._--The kind of joint required depends upon the
+general character of the frame--whether it is to be heavy or light,
+wide or narrow, and whether made of picture frame moulding or of the
+plain framing stock with round or flat face; and the character of the
+frame is a matter of design, determined by the kind of picture, by
+its setting, and by other considerations discussed in Chapter III.
+How the plan for the construction of the frame for any given picture
+is influenced by such considerations may be seen in the example which
+follows:
+
+[Illustration: Dowelled joint]
+
+
+MAKING A FRAME FOR A LARGE PHOTOGRAPHIC REPRODUCTION
+
+This photograph is 60 inches long by 16 inches wide. It is a copy in
+brown tones of a classic painting by Otto Kneille--_The Education of
+Athenian Youth_, the original of which hangs in the Royal Gymnasium in
+Berlin. It represents a spacious hall or court showing three of the
+large marble columns and a massive seat in which an old man reclines
+while another old man is expounding some doctrine to him and to a
+group of younger men gathered around. In the centre of the scene a boy
+lies flat upon the pavement reading a manuscript. Near him several
+youths under the direction of a master, are contending in feats of
+strength. The composition is one that suggests weight and power. It
+may appropriately hang in the hall or in the library over a wide, low
+bookcase.
+
+A picture of this character needs no mat and must have a wide, heavy
+frame. The stock chosen was oak, 4 inches wide, 1-1/2 inches thick,
+and flat faced. The size and weight of such a frame, including the
+glass, demand firmness of construction as the first consideration.
+The stock is too wide for successful mitring because shrinking would
+naturally open and weaken such joints. It was therefore framed together
+with mortise and tenon joints, well glued. A dowelled joint might
+have sufficed, but it would not have the same strength. The mortises
+were cut in the vertical ends and the tenons were left on the long
+horizontal pieces. This was in conformity with the usual method of
+joining framework--for example, door frames, window frames, panel
+frames, and other interior woodwork; for the greatest possible length
+is invariably given to the vertical parts.
+
+The frame was given a dark brown finish, repeating the darkest tones of
+the picture. Long screw eyes were fastened to the back 2 inches from
+the top, so that the picture might hang nearly flat against the wall.
+A strong braided wire about 75 inches long was run through the eyes
+and securely looped at each end, so that a little more than an inch
+of wire on each side passed through the eyes. Since the picture was to
+have a prominent place on a certain wall, two nails 66 inches apart
+allowing for the two widths of the frame as well as for the length of
+the picture were driven into this wall, and the heavy photograph was
+easily hung and balanced without exposing the wire to view.
+
+
+TO MAKE A KNOCK-DOWN BOOKCASE
+
+[Illustration: A knock-down bookcase]
+
+_The Design._--The problem of design was to plan a simple, inexpensive
+bookcase which could be easily transported and set up in a student's
+room and which would hold approximately two hundred books. The drawings
+show how these requirements were met in the design. When in use it is
+held together by keyed shelves at the top and bottom. The necessary
+stiffness is given to it by the base pieces which are fastened both
+to the sides and to the bottom shelf by screws. Additional stiffness
+is given by drawing up the three middle shelves to the sides by
+means of screws. Upon removing the screws and the keys the bookcase
+is easily taken apart so that it may be crated in compact form for
+transportation. It is equally easy to set it up again. It has no back
+and may therefore stand away from the wall as well as against it. Its
+contour is plain, with few curves, giving a simplicity which will
+harmonize with modest surroundings and yet not bar it from keeping
+company with more pretentious furnishings.
+
+The original of this design was actually made up in white wood, stained
+and finished to harmonize with black walnut furniture; but it may
+be made up in oak, ash, cherry, or any of the common woods used for
+furniture. For one bookcase the stock required is as follows, the sizes
+allowing for finishing to the dimensions as given in the drawing: For
+the ends, two pieces 7/8 inch × 10-1/4 inches × 4 feet 2-1/2 inches;
+for the short shelves, three pieces 7/8 inch × 10-1/4 inches × 3 feet
+1 inch; for the long shelves, two pieces, 7/8 inch × 10-1/4 inches ×
+3 feet 5 inches; for the base pieces, two pieces 7/8 inch × 6-3/4 ×
+inches × 3 feet; for the keys, one piece 7/8 inch × 7/8 inch × 1 foot.
+In addition to this there should be two dozen No. 10 round-headed
+blued screws, and one half dozen 1-1/2 inch No. 10 flat headed blued
+screws.
+
+The tools needed are as follows: Rip saw, cross cut saw, back saw,
+compass, jack-plane, smoothing plane, block plane, spokeshave, try
+square, steel square, rule, knife, hammer, mallet, screw-driver, 3/4,
+1/2, and 3/16 inch bits and bitstock, and 1/2 and 3/4 inch chisels,
+gauges, and sand-paper.
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for a knock-down bookcase]
+
+_Construction._--All the stock should be jointed, planed to width,
+and smoothed with sand-paper. The two end pieces should be squared to
+length, the top corners rounded, and the curve at the bottom cut as
+shown in the drawing. Care should be exercised in sand-papering not
+to round the edges. The correct spacing for the shelves should then
+be marked off on the end pieces and squared across, care being taken
+to have both ends spaced alike. To do this plane the ends together,
+with their edges flush; and, beginning at the bottom, measure off each
+of the spaces with correct allowance for the thickness of the shelf
+and mark these spaces across the edge. Then, separate the end pieces
+and with the marks on the edges as a guide, square across each of
+the end pieces on the inside and mark with a knife. In allowing for
+the thickness of the shelves it should be remembered that the stock,
+though originally 7/8 of an inch in thickness, has been planed and
+sand-papered, some of the shelves perhaps having been finished down
+more than others. It will therefore be necessary to measure and allow
+for the thickness of each shelf separately.
+
+[Illustration: Method of gaining-in the shelves]
+
+The three middle shelves are "gained" in--_i. e._, set into grooves in
+the upright ends--1/4 of an inch deep, as shown in the sketch. It will
+be better craftsmanship if the grooves are not carried across the full
+width of the end pieces but stopped, say, one inch from the edge, the
+shelves being cut to fit, as shown in the drawing. If this be done, the
+grooves should be cut out carefully with a chisel. If the grooves be
+carried across the full width of the end, they may be cut down with a
+back saw and then chiselled out. To insure a good fit in either case
+care should be exercised not to cut outside the knife lines. Chisel the
+bottom of the grooves carefully so that they will be uniformly 1/4 of
+an inch deep.
+
+The next step is to cut the mortises for the top and bottom shelves.
+The dimensions for these should first be laid off on the stock by
+means of a gauge. They should then be bored well inside the marks and
+carefully chiselled out. Before this chiselling is done, however,
+knife lines should be marked on the outside of the end pieces exactly
+opposite the gauge lines. In mortising, as in cutting the grooves, the
+greatest care will need to be exercised that the chisel does not cut
+outside the knife lines. In working for a close fit it is better to
+err on the side of removing too little stock at first, if one must err
+at all, since it is quite easy to remove a little more in the final
+fitting. It is quite impossible to replace stock once removed.
+
+In measuring for the length of the shelves it should not be overlooked
+that the top and bottom shelves are to carry the tenons to be keyed
+through the end pieces. These tenons should be cut out accurately with
+a rip saw, and the stock between them removed with a chisel after
+a deep knife line has been made. After fitting these tenons to the
+mortises and finishing them, the mortises for the keys should be cut,
+using a small chisel. It should not be overlooked that the outside
+face of each key mortise is cut on an angle, as illustrated. The three
+middle shelves are then cut to length, the ends squared by means of a
+block plane, and corners cut out to fit the grooves.
+
+[Illustration: Details of the keys]
+
+The parts are now ready to be put together temporarily and squared up
+in order to fit in the base pieces more perfectly than could be done by
+mere measurement. It will add a pleasing detail to set back these base
+pieces 1/4 of an inch from the front and back faces.
+
+After all the parts are carefully fitted they should be assembled
+and the key and screw fastenings inserted. When this is accomplished
+the bookcase is ready for finishing. As this is a distinct part of
+furniture making it is reserved for treatment in a later chapter.
+
+
+A HANGING BOOK RACK
+
+[Illustration: A hanging book rack]
+
+_The Design._--It is designed to plan a light but strong book rack, to
+be fastened to the wall of a chamber. Since it is intended to occupy
+the space that might be given to pictures it is properly as simple in
+construction as a picture frame, depending upon good proportions and
+symmetry to give a pleasing effect. The straight lines of the design,
+which is illustrated above, meet these requirements and also harmonize
+with the general form and outline of books. Both shelves may be used
+for books, if desired, but the design permits them to be confined to
+the lower shelf, reserving the upper one as a suitable place for a bit
+of pottery or two, or some other choice bit of bric-à-brac. The mortise
+and tenon joints give the essential stiffness and strength without
+requiring the use of heavy stock.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--Since strength with lightness is an essential
+feature to realize in the working out of this design, soft woods should
+be avoided. Ash is probably the strongest of the light woods in common
+use. Oak is much stronger but heavy and hard to work. White wood is
+comparatively light and very strong. Gum wood is classified with ash
+excepting that it is closer grained. Since this book rack is to be used
+in a chamber in which the wood trim is in enamelled white and most of
+the furniture of a mahogany finish, it will be equally appropriate to
+make it of white wood, to be finished in enamelled white, or of bay
+wood as a basis for mahogany finish. It was decided to adopt the latter
+course.
+
+The stock requirements for carrying out this design are as follows: 2
+back posts, 1-1/4 inch × 1-1/4 inch × 24 inches; 2 front posts, 1-1/4
+inch × 1-1/4 × 18 inches; 2 centre uprights, 5/8 × 1 × 18 inches; 1
+back rail, 5/8 × 1-1/4 × 37 inches; 1 end rail, 1 × 1-1/4 × 44 inches;
+and 2 shelves, 7/8 × 7 by 37 inches.
+
+[Illustration: Construction details and dimensions for hanging book
+rack (front)]
+
+The tools needed are much like those required in the previous
+problem--_i. e._, the same planes, saws, bitstock, squares, and the
+gauge; but there will be needed a 3/8-inch bit, 3/8-inch and 3/4-inch
+chisels, a knife rule, a rabbet plane, a mitre box, and a mallet.
+
+_Construction._--The details of construction required are as follows:
+Dressing the stock pieces, cutting the posts to length, cutting the
+points on the posts, rabbeting the cross rails and cutting them to
+length, cutting the mortise and tenons, halving on the end rails,
+cutting and fitting the shelves, cutting, fitting, and fastening the
+back rail, arranging the clamps and other appliances for gluing up, and
+cleaning off the glue after hardening.
+
+[Illustration: Construction details and dimensions for hanging book
+rack (end)]
+
+[Illustration: How the tenon is applied to the rail]
+
+The stock pieces should be first "dressed" down to the drawing
+dimensions. This means that they should be planed and sand-papered
+preparatory to laying out the cutting dimensions. The front and back
+posts should be cut to length in the mitre box, care being taken to
+allow an extra 1/2 inch for the pointed ends at the top and bottom.
+These pointed ends are cut in the mitre box by raising one end of the
+post and sawing to lines squared around the post 1/4 inch from the
+other end. The angle of the cut is made uniform by resting the raised
+end of the post on a block lightly nailed on the inside of the mitre
+box, thus giving the same elevation for all the posts. The 1-inch by
+1-1/4-inch piece for rails is rabbeted out, using the plane designed
+for that purpose, and afterward cut to length as called for. The blind
+mortises should be made not more than 7/8 of an inch deep, and the
+tenons 1/16 of an inch shorter in order not to strike the bottom of the
+mortise. One of these rails should be accurately laid out with knife
+lines and the rest marked from this as a pattern. The drawing shows the
+location of the tenon with reference to the part of the rail on which
+the shelf rests. This is the most convenient position for cutting the
+tenon and it also gives greater strength. The centre uprights should
+be halved on after the end rails are in position, being cut for this
+purpose as illustrated in the drawing. They may be allowed to stand out
+1/8 of an inch beyond the face of the end rail, and in making the joint
+an equal amount of stock is to be taken from the rail and from the
+upright. The shelves are then easily cut to length and the ends fitted
+with the block plane and dropped into place, being lightly glued and
+nailed with brads from the under side of the rabbet. Finally the top
+back rail should be halved in, being left to the last in order that the
+more important fitting of the shelves may be more easily accomplished.
+
+[Illustration: How the centre uprights are halved on]
+
+In gluing up the mortise and tenon joints care must be exercised to
+set clamps out ready for use before the glue is applied so that the
+parts may be promptly drawn up in position. After gluing they should be
+allowed to remain about ten hours in order that the glue may properly
+harden before the clamps are taken off. All the extra glue squeezed out
+of the joints in clamping must be scraped off with a chisel, after the
+glue has hardened a little; and any remaining spots of glue must be
+carefully removed with fine sand-paper so as not to leave anything to
+interfere with the filling and finishing.
+
+
+AN UMBRELLA STAND
+
+_The Design._--So far as the question of use is concerned, no problem
+of design could be more definite than this one, since an umbrella
+rack can have but one use. The only elements of beauty possible are
+found in simplicity, proportion, and the general effectiveness of
+the construction for meeting the demands of use. The drawing shows
+four square, straight posts, squared at the ends, which are allowed
+to project a little above the top to avoid a box-like effect. All the
+joints are mortised except the division bars at the top. The cross
+pieces at the base are made wider not only to conceal the drip pan but
+to give a more stable appearance to the whole rack.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--Oak is selected as perhaps the most appropriate
+wood; but other woods, if the surroundings require it, may be used to
+good advantage. Oak is one of the strongest and most durable of the
+woods used for furniture and takes well a great variety of finish. It
+is also quite easily obtained.
+
+[Illustration: An umbrella stand]
+
+The stock requirements are as follows: Four corner posts 1-1/4 × 1-1/4
+× 27-1/2 inches; four top rails 1/2 × 1-1/4 × 9 inches; four base rails
+7/8 × 3 × 9 inches; two division bars 1/4 × 1-1/4 × 9-1/4 inches; four
+cleats 1/2 × 1/2 × 9 inches; and one board 1/2 × 7-1/2 × 7-1/2 inches
+to support the pan.
+
+The same tools in general will be required as in the previous
+exercises, but it will be necessary to add a 1/4-inch bit, a 1/4 inch
+chisel, a steel scraper, and two short clamps.
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for umbrella rack]
+
+_Construction._--All the stock should be planed to size, scraped, and
+sand-papered with the exception of the base board for the pan, since
+that is hidden from view. The scraper corrects all slight unevenness of
+surface and removes scratches and other blemishes. Care should be taken
+in sand-papering to rub always with the grain of the wood and to avoid
+rounding the corners. The corner posts should first be cut to proper
+length and the tops and bottoms slightly chamfered. Mortises are then
+to be located, bored, and chiselled up. The top and bottom rails should
+be laid off and the tenons gauged and cut, care being taken not to have
+them too long. The inside edges of the tenons have to be pared off
+slightly, as illustrated in the drawing, to allow room for each when
+they come together.
+
+[Illustration: Top rail tenons]
+
+[Illustration: Bottom rail tenons]
+
+The next step is to assemble the parts, clamp them up, and test them
+for accuracy. While these parts are in the clamps, measurements should
+be taken for the cross pieces, which may then be made, allowing extra
+length of 1/4 of an inch in each end for the tenons to enter the top
+rails. These cross pieces are to be halved together at the centre, as
+shown in the drawing. The base rails are designed to be thick enough
+to take up all the space on the inside of the posts so as to hide the
+corner, as illustrated in the sketch showing the bottom construction.
+
+The next step is to assemble the parts for gluing. It is not necessary
+to explain this process in detail, since it has already been thoroughly
+explained in the general section on gluing. It is not necessary to glue
+on the cleats on which the pan rests; they may be nailed in. When the
+base is glued together measurements may be taken for the pan.
+
+
+A MAGAZINE STAND
+
+_The Design._--This problem calls for an attractive article of
+furniture which should also be useful as a receptacle for magazines and
+current newspapers. An enclosed portion between two of the shelves is
+desired to conceal from view and preserve for a time the more valuable
+papers, parts of magazines, or clippings, as may be found convenient.
+The perspective sketch on this same page shows how these simple
+requirements are met. The overhanging top adds character and strength
+to what might otherwise seem too light for the load it is intended to
+carry.
+
+[Illustration: A magazine stand]
+
+_Materials and Tools._--Oak is selected as a suitable wood because of
+its strength and durability; for this stand is likely to be in almost
+constant use. A light wood, delicately finished, would soon show wear.
+
+The stock list, according to the drawing, may be itemized as follows:
+4 corner posts 1-3/4 × 1-3/4 × 36 inches; 4 upright slats 5/8 × 1 ×
+34 inches; four shelves 7/8 × 10-1/2 × 17 inches; one piece for the
+top 7/8 × 14 × 21 inches; 2 top rails 1 × 1-3/4 × 12 inches; 1 piece
+for the door 7/8 × 8 × 15-1/2 inches for the ends and the back of the
+closet 1 piece 5/8 × 8 × 36 inches; 1 pair 1-1/4-inch brass butts with
+screws for the hinges, and one brass knob or catch.
+
+The tools needed are a jointer, a block plane, a smoothing plane, steel
+square, try square, knife gauge, fine cross cut saw, 1/2-inch bit and
+bit stock, key-hole saw, 1/2-inch chisel, mallet, nail set, hammer,
+screw-driver, and steel scraper.
+
+The principal operations are as follows: Planing to size; scraping and
+sand-papering stock; squaring ends and smoothing them to the required
+length; laying out gains at corner posts; making mortises for top
+rails; making the rails; assembling the main parts; fitting ends and
+sides of the closets; hanging the door and putting on the fixtures.
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for magazine stand]
+
+_The Construction._--Smoothing with the plane and scraping are very
+important and they should be completed before any sand-papering is done
+because particles of sand (silica), adhering to the wood, will dull
+the steel tools. All three operations are needed to remove the marks
+of the machine tools of the factory, in order to give a good finish in
+the end. The scraper follows the plane, removing the unevenness which
+the latter leaves on board surfaces. Sand-papering gives the finishing
+touches.
+
+[Illustration: Method of mortising]
+
+After the stock is well smoothed, the top and the shelves should be
+squared off, cut to length, and block planed. The posts should then be
+cut and accurately trimmed to dimensions. They may be marked with a
+knife line for the gains into which the corners of the shelves are to
+be fastened. Since the posts are perfectly square, no attention will
+have to be given to their exact location in marking or cutting the
+gains; but when the mortising for the rails is laid out, care must be
+exercised to mark them so that the mortises will come on the proper
+faces for assembling. In mortising for the top rail it is well not to
+work up to the end of the post but to cut back, say 3/4 of an inch, as
+shown in one of the details. The rails may now be laid off and the
+tenons cut and fitted. It is exactly 8-1/2 inches between the shoulders
+of the rails. Since the shelves are 10-1/2 inches wide, one inch is
+thus left on each side to be gained into the posts.
+
+The parts are now ready for the first assembling. To do this it is
+convenient to have a clear bench top on which the posts may be laid on
+one side, face down. The rails and shelves may then be slipped into
+place, the other two posts placed on top, and the whole clamped firmly
+together. This is the preliminary assembling for the purpose of testing
+the accuracy of the work. If it be found all right, it should be taken
+apart again, and, after glue has been applied to the tenons and to
+the ends of the shelves, the parts should be quickly re-assembled
+and clamped up as before, with the angles kept true. Before the glue
+hardens the shelves should be nailed into the posts, as indicated in
+the drawing. In this case it is the nail that is the main stay. The
+glue is accessory, adding much to the stiffness of the construction.
+
+[Illustration: Method of fastening shelf]
+
+The top may now be set on and fastened by screws or by brads driven
+through into the posts and well set so that they may be concealed
+by putty, coloured to match the stain used. The end slats should be
+fastened on in the same way. The back and ends of the closet are next
+cut to size and bradded in. The door is then fitted and, to break the
+surface a little, an ornamental design is cut in the centre. Still
+further relief is given by setting in the door 1/4 of an inch from the
+edge of the shelf and ends of the closet. The door is now hung on brass
+hinges, the stop and catch added, and the stand is ready for staining
+and finishing.
+
+[Illustration: Method of fastening posts to the top]
+
+
+A LIGHT LIBRARY TABLE
+
+_The Design._--This is to be a table designed on simple lines and of
+good proportions. It is to have no drawer but as much shelf room as
+conveniently possible. The under shelf is designed to be cut out to
+allow a chair to be drawn up on either side. The end shelves may be
+regarded as designed to combine a bookcase with the table, thus adding
+much to its usefulness.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--For a table of this kind oak is very
+appropriate. The following list gives the stock required for one table.
+The widths and the thickness are as called for in the drawing, but the
+lengths are given a little long to allow for cutting. A board not less
+than 9 inches wide and 10 feet long will be needed as stock for the
+top, the dimensions of which are 7/8 × 26 × 39 inches. A 10-inch board,
+4-1/2 feet in length, will also be required for the shelves. There will
+also be needed four legs 1-3/4 × 1-3/4 × 30 inches; eight slats 1/2 ×
+1-1/2 × 18 inches; two back pieces 1/2 × 2 × 20-1/2 inches; two rails
+7/8 × 3 × 32 inches; and two rails 7/8 × 3 × 20 inches.
+
+[Illustration: A light library table]
+
+The same tools will be required as in the foregoing problems excepting
+that a 1/2-inch bit and a 1/2-inch chisel will be required for
+mortising, and two 3-foot clamps.
+
+_Construction._--The first step in the construction is to dress the
+stock, smoothing, scraping, and sand-papering it, and working the
+various parts to size. The lengths, however, of all parts excepting
+the legs are not cut accurately until, in the process of construction,
+these parts are needed. The legs are at once cut to length and the
+mortises laid out, bored, and cut. A gain should also be cut in each
+leg, into which the bottom shelf is to be fitted, glued, and bradded
+from the under side. The end and side rails may then be laid off for
+shoulders and tenons, and cut. In this case the tenons should be made
+1/2 of an inch wide.
+
+[Illustration: Construction details and dimensions (a) front; (b) end]
+
+In gluing up, the top should receive attention first, in order to allow
+the longest possible time for testing the work under the inevitable
+changes due to continued seasoning. Great care must always be exercised
+in making the glued joints. It is often necessary to make them over
+on account of the development of cracks. Proper care, however, will
+prevent this. The general directions for gluing, given at the beginning
+of this chapter, will be of service.
+
+As soon as the top has been glued the four short side pieces may be
+glued to the shelf, taking pains to make good joints before applying
+the glue. It should be noted that the inside ends of these short
+pieces are to be 15 inches apart, and it is important that the ends
+on opposite sides should be exactly squared across, as indicated in
+the drawings. This may be accomplished by first locating the centre
+of the shelf, at the intersection of lines, marked c in the drawing,
+and measuring 7-1/2 inches each way to the line of the back pieces,
+which are to run across the whole bottom shelf. As soon as the glue is
+hardened the ends should be squared and made true to set into the gains
+when the table is assembled. Finally, the legs, the rails, and the
+shelf may be assembled, glued, squared up, clamped, and set aside to
+harden before the clamps are removed.
+
+It is a good plan to brad the shelf in from the under side before
+the glue hardens. After standing a few hours the table will be ready
+for the 1/2-inch strip which forms the back of the shelf. This is to
+be fitted and bradded in. Then the slats may be cut to length. They
+project slightly below the shelf, and are fastened in position by
+screws. The top may be cut to length and its ends smoothed, after which
+it may be fastened on the frame by means of screws and buttons, as
+already described in the early part of this chapter.
+
+
+A HEAVY LIBRARY TABLE
+
+_The Design._--This table, as the illustration shows, is designed to be
+of simple style, without a drawer or side shelves, and with the bottom
+shelf keyed into the base rail. Heavy, square legs, and mortise and
+tenon joints are called for.
+
+[Illustration: A heavy library table]
+
+_Materials and Tools._--The mission type of furniture, to which this
+design belongs, suggests oak as the fitting wood. The stock for the
+top, the dimensions of which are to be 7/8 × 28 × 44 inches, may be
+cut in three pieces from a 10-inch board, 12 feet long. For the shelf
+a board 7/8 × 12 × 43 inches is required. There are needed also four
+legs 2-3/4 × 2-3/4 × 30 inches; two side rails 7/8 × 4 × 36 inches; two
+end top-rails 7/8 × 4 × 22 inches; two end bottom rails 1-1/2 × 4 × 22
+inches; and for keys a strip 1 × 2 × 28 inches.
+
+[Illustration: Construction details and dimensions (front)]
+
+The same tools are required as were needed in the foregoing problem.
+
+_Construction._--Since this table has a larger top than the light
+library table, even greater pains must be taken than in the case of the
+smaller table to join the boards for gluing up. All like parts should
+be laid off together and the necessary mortises and tenons cut and
+fitted, as in the previous case. The two end rails may be glued into
+the legs first and clamped, leaving the side rails to be put in place
+last, when the bottom shelf may also be fastened in without gluing by
+means of the tenons and keys. The latter should be cut somewhat longer
+than is really needed so that they may appear to be as effective as
+they really are; and they should be tapered at least 1/2 of an inch in
+order to drive up well. A small brad may be driven in to keep them from
+getting loose when the work shrinks.
+
+[Illustration: Construction details and dimensions (end)]
+
+
+A BOOKCASE WITH GLAZED DOORS
+
+_The Design._--This is to be an upright bookcase, with five shelves
+and an overhanging top. Some variety of surface is afforded by the
+arrangement of the sash, as indicated in the drawing. The shelves are
+made to be adjustable, and not fixed as in other problems.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--The stock required for one bookcase of this
+pattern is as follows: two end pieces 7/8 × 11-1/2 × 48-1/2 inches; for
+the top and bottom, two pieces 7/8 × 12 × 40 inches; four shelves 7/8
+× 11 × 40 inches; for the sides of the doors, four pieces 7/8 × 2 × 45
+inches; for the top and bottom rails of the doors, four pieces 7/8 ×
+2-1/2 × 18 inches; for the middle rail, one piece 7/8 × 2 × 18 inches;
+for the sash, one piece 7/8 × 1/2 inch × 6 feet; for the back, enough
+1/2 inch stock to cover the space 38 × 46 inches. In addition to this
+there will be required four hinges, two catches, a lock, and glass for
+the sash as dimensioned in the drawing. It is not necessary, however,
+to cut the small lights. One large pane of glass may be set in the full
+width of the door so that the small sash divisions may be apparent
+rather than real.
+
+[Illustration: Bookcase with glazed doors]
+
+The tools for this problem are the same as those used in previous
+problems with the addition of a 1/4-inch bit and 1/4-inch chisel, and a
+rabbet plane, or a universal plane for cutting out the rabbet for the
+glass.
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for bookcase]
+
+It is not necessary to give directions for the treatment of the
+stock, since it is practically the same as that employed in preceding
+problems. The details for cutting dimensions are given in the
+accompanying drawings. It would be well for the young woodworker to
+study these carefully and make out a working plan of procedure similar
+to that which has been outlined in other problems.
+
+_Construction._--The first thing to do is to erect the bookcase--_i.e._,
+to cut the sides, the top, the bottom, and the back pieces to proper
+form and dimensions, bring them into position, and fasten them. It will
+be noticed that the sides and top are rabbeted out, as indicated in one
+of the small drawings, so that the edge of the back will not show when
+it is nailed in position. The bottom shelf is also made narrow enough
+to allow the back boards to be brought down over it and nailed to the
+edge.
+
+[Illustration: Method of concealing ends of back boards]
+
+After the case is erected the doors should be laid out according to
+the drawing for mortises and tenons, and the inside edges rabbeted to
+give an inset for the glass. If it is decided to use one large light
+at the top of the door instead of six small ones, the sash effect for
+this light will have to be made of pieces thin enough to allow this
+arrangement. When the doors are ready for setting the glass it may
+be held in place by small 1/4 round strips, bradded in behind it.
+Great care should, of course, be exercised in gluing up the doors to
+avoid strains which might give them such a twist that they could not
+be fitted to the case. Careful fitting of all the mortises and tenons
+and the usual assembling of the parts of each door before gluing is
+attempted is a wise precaution. It will also be wise to allow a little
+stock for trimming off, both on the sides and on the ends, when the
+doors are finally fitted in.
+
+
+A ROUND CENTRE TABLE
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for round centre table]
+
+[Illustration: Detail of top mortise]
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for round centre table]
+
+_The Design._--This problem calls for a table of mission style with
+square legs set into the circumference of the table flush with the
+top and having tenons exposed on the face of the legs. Simplicity of
+form combined with strength characterizes the design.
+
+_Materials and Tools._--Quartered oak is recommended for a table of
+this design. The stock required for one table is as follows: four legs
+2-3/4 × 2-3/4 × 27 inches; two cross rails 1-1/4 × 3 × 29 inches; one
+piece of 3 × 12 × 20 inches for the curved rails; and stock enough to
+make a round top 1-1/8 inches thick and 27 inches in diameter.
+
+The only tools desirable to provide, in addition to those previously
+used, are a trammel and spokeshave or a circle plane.
+
+_Construction._--The first step is to join up and glue the top so
+that it may have ample time to harden and dry while the other work is
+being accomplished. The stock for the legs may then be dressed and the
+bottom mortises marked and cut through the posts. Care must be taken
+to transfer the marks to the opposite side so that the mortises may be
+accurately outlined on the face. Care must also be taken in cutting the
+mortises, in order to make good, clean joints. A dimensioned detail of
+the top mortises, which are to receive the tenons of the curved rail,
+shown on page 180, should be consulted before laying out this work.
+It should be noticed that the legs project 1-1/4 inches above the top
+rail. After the top mortises are cut the cross bottom rails should be
+halved together and the tenons laid off and cut. It will be noticed
+that the projecting end of the tenons is to be bevelled off, but this
+should not be done until the fitting is completed.
+
+In laying out the plan of work for the construction of the curved rails
+the trammel comes into use. With this, mark off carefully the inside
+and outside curves on a thin piece of board and, with a large steel
+square, draw straight lines from the centre or pivot point, making an
+exact quarter circle. This is shown in one of the drawings on page
+180. Then, parallel with each straight line and on the inside, mark
+off other lines one half the thickness of the leg. This locates the
+shoulder of the tenon. The pattern should then be carefully cut out
+of the thin board and used as a template for marking out on the stock
+the form of the curved rails. After these rails are band sawed and
+smoothed, the tenons may be cut.
+
+When the framing parts of the table have all been cut and fitted they
+may be assembled and glued. Finally the top is placed face down on
+a bench top or on horses, and the inverted frame laid over it and
+centred to give the correct position of the insets for the legs. These
+should be laid off with great care, the outline reproduced exactly on
+the opposite side, and the stock cut out. The top and frame should then
+be fastened together from the under side. After a few finishing touches
+have been given to the projecting ends and exposed surfaces, the table
+will be ready for the filling and varnishing.
+
+
+A LIBRARY DESK
+
+This is the most ambitious of the special problems in furniture making
+here suggested. Details are given in the drawings on the opposite page.
+If the young woodworker can give sufficient time to it and can command
+the services of a few machine tools it will not be an unreasonable task
+to undertake. Most of the operations required in its construction have
+already been carefully explained and need not be repeated as detailed
+directions. There are, however, one or two principles of cabinet-making
+called for in this problem which were not required in the others. They
+will therefore need explanation.
+
+[Illustration: A library desk]
+
+_Panelling._--To avoid the difficulties which would result from the
+swelling, shrinking, and warping of wide surfaces in furniture it is
+common practice to make use of the panel. The design of the panel is
+easily understood. It consists of a framework of ordinary thickness,
+put together usually with mortise and tenon joints. The inside edges of
+this framework are grooved, and into the groove is fitted a piece of
+stock generally thinner than the frame which fills the space between
+the sides of the frame. The panel board may be in one piece of wide
+stock or it may be glued up. It may be of very thin stock inset on
+both sides of the panel, or it may be of thicker stock inset only on
+one side, and perhaps not inset on either side, in which case only the
+edges of the board are made thin enough to run in the groove of the
+panel frame. In this problem the panel board is to be made of 1/2-inch
+stock, flat on the outside, and inset 1/4 of an inch. The back of the
+panel board is flush with the frame and is chamfered off to give the
+necessary tongue all around to run in the groove. The narrow stock
+of the framework is not likely to swell or shrink appreciably and,
+if well constructed, cannot become warped or twisted. The panel, on
+account of its greater width, may and generally does swell and shrink
+considerably; but it should be fitted to move easily in the grooves so
+that its changes may not be noticeable. Should it be desired to finish
+the panels with a moulding this should be nailed to the rails, not to
+the panel board.
+
+_Danger in the Power Saw._--The panel frame may be constructed by hand,
+but if a circular saw be available it will be found of great service.
+Beginners, however, should employ the services of an expert sawyer and
+not assume the great risk involved in the use of a circular saw or even
+a band saw, especially if these saws are without guards. The necessary
+operations should be carefully laid out on the partially finished
+stock, with a good square and gauge. A combination plane is quite
+essential for cutting the grooves; and this carries its own gauge. Care
+should be taken to make all measurements from the centre of the piece,
+and gauge and square always from the face sides and from the face edges
+of the joints. The cuts that it is necessary to make for the joints are
+indicated in the drawing. In gluing up, the directions already given in
+the section on gluing should be followed.
+
+_Sand-papering._--There is a legitimate use for sand-paper in the
+finishing stages of the work on this desk, as there is, in fact, in
+almost every kind of fine woodwork. Its use has already been advised
+in the directions for furniture making. In furniture manufactories
+sand-papering machines are among the most expensive machines to be
+found in the shops; and their high cost is of course justified by
+their productive value. It is quite impossible to work down large
+pieces to a good surface by the process of planing. If a sand-papering
+machine is within easy reach of the amateur cabinet-maker, it will
+be very desirable for him to send all large pieces like the tops of
+tables and panel boards to the factory in order to have them run
+through the machine. The expense is very slight. In sand-papering by
+hand considerable pressure should be applied as evenly as possible
+and always along the grain. Any movements directly across the grain
+or at an angle are sure to show through the finish. The process is
+facilitated by wrapping the sand-paper around a block of wood about 2
+× 4 inches in diameter or, better still, a block of cork of the same
+dimensions.
+
+
+A MORRIS CHAIR
+
+_History of the Design._--Among furniture designs the Morris chair has
+become a classic. It takes its name for its originator, William Morris,
+the great English designer and reformer, to whom, perhaps more than to
+any other person, we are indebted for sane and honest work in furniture
+design and in all forms of household decoration, not only in England
+but in other European countries and in America. And probably no one of
+his creations has done more to teach the lesson of simplicity, comfort,
+and utility in furniture than the Morris chair.
+
+[Illustration: A Morris chair]
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions of Morris chair (front)]
+
+[Illustration: Details and dimensions for Morris chair (side)]
+
+It may be well to add, however, that like many other famous works
+of art, the original design of William Morris has suffered much in
+countless imitations. The furniture shops display carved and otherwise
+embellished monstrosities under the name of Morris chairs which are
+nothing less than an insult to the great name they bear. But the life
+of all imitations of original and really great ideas is bound to be
+short. Only the good and true, which are the original, survive. The
+really valuable features of the original Morris chair design, combining
+beauty of material with simplicity of form and construction, have taken
+a lasting hold upon the hearts of all people who have found solid
+comfort in these chairs. The chairs contemplated in this problem are
+illustrated on page 50, chapter II. Both are in quartered oak. The one
+on the right is stained in dark brown and has a box cushion for the
+seat and a pillow cushion for the back, in medium brown leather. The
+one on the left is in light fumed oak with cushions of mahogany velour.
+On account of its smaller dimensions it is somewhat lighter in weight
+than the one on the right, and the dimensions of the smaller one will
+be followed in this problem. This chair is an exact copy of one in
+ash which, with a centre table and stool, were designed and made for a
+college girl's room; and a large part of the work of constructing the
+three pieces of furniture was done by the girl herself.
+
+By careful examination of the dimensioned drawing shown on the
+preceding page the young woodworker who undertakes this problem should
+select his stock according to the following list: 4 legs 2-1/2 × 2-1/2
+× 24 inches; two arms 3 × 5-1/2 × 38 inches; two bottom side rails
+1-1/8 × 6 × 26 inches; two top side rails 5/8 × 2-1/4 × 26 inches;
+two bottom rails (front and back) 1-1/8 × 6 × 24 inches; one top rail
+(back) 5/8 × 2-1/4 × 24 inches; two back uprights 1-1/8 × 1-7/8 × 25
+inches; three cross pieces for back (lower) 3/4 × 2-5/8 × 20 inches;
+one cross piece for back (top) 3/4 × 6 × 20 inches; one bracket 1 × 3 ×
+18 inches; four pins 4-1/2 × 4-1/4 inches square.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of Morris chair arm]
+
+[Illustration: Detail of pins]
+
+In sawing up the stock, allowance should be made of course, for
+necessary waste in working down to the drawing dimensions. The arms
+are drawn with a curve and may be fashioned by band sawing them out
+of 3-inch stock. There will be a considerable saving in material and
+labour, of course, if the arms are made flat; but the effect of the
+curve is very pleasing. The back slats may be sawed to a slight curve,
+which is another attractive feature; but flat slats are easier to make
+and just as serviceable.
+
+The process of construction does not differ in general from that
+already described in some of the foregoing problems, and need not
+be repeated here in detail. The method of finishing this and all
+other furniture referred to in the problems will be explained in the
+following chapter.
+
+Since the Morris chair is a heavy piece of furniture, it will be
+necessary to provide casters for it. The Acme Pin caster, so-called,
+was used in the chair referred to in this problem. It makes use of a
+steel ball turning upon ball bearings, and is set up into the legs so
+as to leave only about 1/4 of an inch of the ball exposed.
+
+
+A HALL CLOCK
+
+
+[Illustration: A hall clock
+
+NOTE.--The original of the hall clock was designed and made by Mr.
+Egbert E. MacNary.]
+
+_Design._--This clock was designed and built to conform to the
+requirements of the space allotted to it. The lines of the case are
+all straight; there are no spires or gables or fantastic curves on the
+top. A hall clock is indoors, and the top should be horizontal; for all
+the other lines such as tops of window casings, picture moulding, etc.,
+are horizontal. If the clock stood out of doors under the stars, then
+the top might be spired or pointed.
+
+[Illustration: Construction detail of a hall clock]
+
+The construction, as indicated in the sketches, is simple and
+substantial. The long sides extend the entire height of the clock,
+being firmly joined into the base and head. The works are supported
+between these sides. The wood is 3/4-inch quartered oak, hand dressed,
+and stained a warm brown. The dial, hinges, catches, pendulum, and
+weight are of brass.
+
+_Cutting Glass with a Wheel Cutter._--The long door has a panel of
+transparent leaded glass. This leaded glass work is a most fascinating
+process. The lead strips required for it were purchased of a dealer in
+lead specialties. Stained glass window concerns are usually willing
+to sell this lead. A full-size drawing was made of the design for
+the glass panel and the glass cut in pieces to match the pattern. A
+ten-cent wheel glass cutter was used. One caution, kept in mind, will
+enable one to use a wheel cutter of this kind without injuring it. _It
+should never be used twice in the same cut._ One stroke of a few inches
+over a cut previously made will ruin the wheel; but if the wheel is
+not abused by tracing over a cut, it will last a long time. The glass
+should be laid on a level table and the cutter used with a firm hand,
+making a continuous cut against a straight edge.
+
+_Soldering._--The long lines of the design are in one piece; and
+there is a strip around the entire outside edge. To solder the pieces
+together, the glass and lead strips are laid in position on a board,
+and brads (about 1 inch long) are driven part way into the board close
+against the outside strips, so as to hold the pieces in position.
+A small bead of soldering paste is placed on each joint. A small
+soldering "iron" (which is really copper) and wire solder are used. The
+copper may be "tinned" by filing the point bright, heating it, dipping
+it in the soldering paste, and then quickly touching it to the solder
+wire. The point will become coated with the solder, or, as we say,
+"tinned." The iron will need frequent heating. A quick, light touch of
+the iron and solder wire to the joints will give the best result.
+
+[Illustration: Method of holding glass and lead strips for soldering]
+
+The two rings in the brass dial were "raised" by driving the brass
+into a groove in a piece of oak with a hard wood wedge. The piece of
+oak was revolved around the dial by means of a nail driven through the
+centre of the dial into the oak piece. When a short arc of the ring had
+been raised, the grooved piece was swung around about 1 inch and the
+groove continued.
+
+[Illustration: Method of raising the dial rings]
+
+The length of the pendulum depends upon the number of teeth in the
+escape wheel. It was necessary in the case of this clock to take out
+the escape wheel, which had 32 teeth, and substitute one of 22 teeth to
+accommodate the length of pendulum desired.
+
+[Illustration: Dimensioned dial piece of clock before edges are turned]
+
+
+OUTDOOR FURNITURE
+
+The greatest charm of home life in the summer season is rarely found
+within the house. This is especially true in the village or in the
+country, where nature is at her best; but even in city homes that
+are fortunate enough to include in their surroundings a small yard, a
+bit of garden, or any means of connecting the home with "God's great
+out-of-doors," though it be but a sheltered balcony or a window garden,
+the touch of nature is not lost. It is possible, however, for art to
+assist nature; and in many cases her assistance is very much needed.
+It is certainly true that nature cannot be left wholly to herself in
+the neighbourhood of the village or city home. If there be a garden,
+as much forethought must be exercised in planning it and as much pains
+taken in developing and caring for it as is called for in working out
+any form of interior decoration. There are problems of design and
+construction suggested by the need of suitable chairs and settles for
+the piazza, comfortable hammocks and couches for the balcony, awnings
+for the windows on the sunny side, and the right furniture, perhaps,
+for an out-door dining-room. The more decorative features are found in
+the rose arbours, the trellises, the garden screens, the lawn tent, the
+pergola, and the garden gate; and all these offer problems that easily
+come within the reach of enterprising and capable young craftsmen.
+
+_General Types._--In the designing of out-door furniture there are
+two suggestions from nature that may appropriately find expression.
+On the one hand large masses, as seen in the hills and rocks, suggest
+solidity, weight, and permanence. This idea is embodied in walls of
+masonry, stone posts, iron gates, stone or concrete pedestals, or
+in some other kind of heavy construction. On the other hand, there
+are the suggestions of lightness, delicacy, and growth, seen in the
+growing vines, shrubbery, and small trees, which are carried out in the
+so-called rustic furniture, trellises, arbours, and garden screens.
+
+_An Example of Heavy Furniture in Wood._--A settle designed for
+comparatively permanent use in some cool or retired corner of the
+garden may be made of native pine, white wood, or spruce, well
+protected by several coats of paint. A suggestion is here given for
+such a design, laid out on substantial lines. Ordinary 4 × 4 spruce,
+planed, may be used for the posts, pine or white wood for the rest
+of the construction, 2-inch stock being used for the back pieces and
+arms, and 7/8-inch boards for the rails and seat. Mortise and tenon
+joints should be used in the framing. The illustration shows also a
+simple design cut in the back pieces and repeated in the two front
+posts. It is a decorative feature which seems to counteract, somewhat
+successfully, the general severity of the lines on which the settle is
+designed to be built.
+
+[Illustration: A garden settle]
+
+_Concrete Furniture._--Still more substantial out-door furniture
+may be made of concrete cement. This material has come into use for
+sidewalks and pavements and as a substitute for brick and stone masonry
+in retaining walls, bridge abutments, and in a great variety of heavy
+building construction. Concrete is, in fact, an artificial stone, made
+by mixing Portland cement with sand or pulverized rock in the right
+proportions, thoroughly wetting the mixture with water, and allowing it
+to harden. It is so commonly associated with heavy, crude work that it
+is not easy to believe that it may be also fashioned into anything of
+an artistic or decorative character; and yet it is capable of a wide
+range of out-door decorative uses. Gate posts, pedestals, fountains,
+window boxes, urns, and other forms of garden pottery in great variety,
+tables, and garden seats, have been successfully moulded in this
+material. Its natural stone gray colour and surface are well suited to
+many of these uses; but it may be given a variety of colour effects in
+bold design if occasion requires it. In weight and durability it leaves
+nothing to be desired.
+
+_The Wire Form._--Concrete cement cannot be modelled like clay. In
+its formative state it is too soft for such manipulation. It must be
+supported in some way while it is being worked into the desired shape
+and until it has hardened. In general there are two methods of giving
+the necessary support: _viz._, by employing an interior framework or
+skeleton, generally of wire lath, which is permanently encased in the
+cement; or by using a plaster or wooden mould into which the material
+in a soft and plastic state is poured and from which it is removed when
+hardened. The latter method has been elaborated quite extensively for
+commercial purposes, because it readily yields an indefinite number
+of marketable results from the same moulds. The simpler wooden moulds
+may be easily made by a clever boy; and after a little experience
+he can soon learn how to mix the cement properly and mould a form
+successfully. For single pieces of concrete work, however, the wire
+forms are to be preferred. A suggestive illustration of this method is
+found in the following problem:
+
+
+A CYLINDRICAL GARDEN VASE
+
+The dimensions called for in this design are a diameter of 10 inches
+and a height of 8 inches. The wire form must therefore be made to
+approximate quite closely to these dimensions. A good material for
+the form is galvanized wire lath of 1/2-inch mesh. This problem will
+require a piece about 8 inches wide and 34 inches long for the convex
+side, and a piece about 10 inches square for the base. From the square
+piece a circle 10 inches in diameter should be cut out. A strong pair
+of tinners' shears will be needed for this purpose. In bending the long
+piece into the cylindrical form it is well to proceed slowly in order
+to produce an evenly curved surface--_i. e._, one free from angular
+bends. A good way to accomplish this result is to lay the piece down on
+a bench top and bend it up over a cylindrical wooden block. If nothing
+better is available a rolling pin will serve this purpose. When the
+bending is nearly complete, the two ends of the piece should be brought
+together, lapped over about an inch, and bound together with free ends
+of the strands of wire. A pair of pliers will be of great assistance.
+If this part of the process has been carefully done, there will result
+a cylindrical form 10 inches in diameter. The circular piece should now
+be attached to one end of this form by means of the free ends of the
+strands found there, bending the projecting wires over and clinching
+them at convenient points on the circumference of the circular piece
+where there are uncut meshes of the wire. The form is now ready for
+covering with the cement.
+
+[Illustration: A garden vase]
+
+The first step is the mixing of the cement for what is known as the
+scratch coat. This is made by mixing Portland cement with fine, clean
+sand in the proportion of one part cement to two of sand. These
+ingredients should be thoroughly mixed together in the dry state, and
+then there should be added a small quantity of goats' hair, well picked
+apart. For the problem at hand about five pounds of cement will be
+needed and as much goats' hair as can be held in the hand. The whole
+should be thoroughly wet down with just the right amount of water. It
+is important that the mixture should not be made too soft. A scratch
+coat should be given a consistency that will enable it to be easily
+spread over the wire form and, at the same time, to hang well together.
+
+When a sufficient amount of the right mixture has been obtained, it
+should be spread upon the wire form by means of a small mason's trowel
+or a large knife. It is well to begin at the bottom of the convex side
+of the cylinder, working upward, taking no pains to make this first
+coat smooth, since roughness is desirable, and paying no attention
+whatever to the inside of the cylinder, excepting to see that the
+cement is forced well through the meshes so that the whole mass will
+be held together firmly when dry. The inside is given a smooth coat
+as a part of the later finishing process. When the convex surface has
+been well covered, the form should be turned bottom up and the cement
+spread upon the base of the cylinder in the same way. After the wire
+has been completely covered, the form, which is likely to be somewhat
+distorted, should be corrected by careful manipulation till a true
+cylinder has been obtained. This is allowed to stand for about five
+hours until the cement has thoroughly hardened. It is then ready for
+the finishing coat.
+
+The next step in the process is to make the cement for the finishing
+coat. Considerable variety is possible here, depending upon the colour
+and other surface effects that are desired. In this design a light,
+sparkling surface when finished is required. To produce this effect a
+mixture of one part Portland cement and two parts marble dust will be
+needed. This should be mixed without hair to a consistency like that
+used for the scratch coat.
+
+Before applying the finishing coat the surfaces should be thoroughly
+moistened by means of a brush well filled with water. There are various
+methods of applying this coat. The simplest is carefully spreading it
+on with a trowel and smoothing it with the moistened hand. When the
+surface has hardened sufficiently it is sometimes possible to improve
+the finish by the judicious use of sand-paper or a coarse file. It is
+not possible to produce perfectly even surfaces in this way; and yet
+the method has the characteristic freedom of handwork in general, and
+yields very satisfactory results.
+
+[Illustration: A vase with blocked rim]
+
+_The Decoration._--A great variety of decorative effects may be
+obtained in concrete pottery and in other articles made of this
+material for out-door use. In pottery these decorations may take the
+form of raised figures or ornaments, of borders or designs cut in the
+surface, and of inlays in colour. Whatever the form of design, the
+necessary cutting for it is best made when the cement has become well
+set but not very hard--_i. e._, from 6 to 10 hours after the finishing
+coat is applied. A stout, sharp, pointed knife blade is all the tool
+that will be required. A narrow chisel, however, may be found desirable
+for deepening the cuts. The knife should be guided by means of a ruler,
+which should be flexible if used on curved surfaces; and the depth
+of the cut will depend somewhat upon the size of the piece. In work
+similar to that described in the problem just given, a depth of 3/16
+or 1/4 of an inch is sufficient. This cutting, of course can be made
+after the cement has hardened, by the use of hammer and chisel; but it
+will be much more difficult.
+
+[Illustration: A square form]
+
+_The Colours._--Colour cement for inlaid designs is made by using the
+best quality of white Portland cement as a base, colouring it with dry
+mineral pigments which are sold by dealers under the name of lime or
+cement-proof colours. Among the pigments suitable for this purpose are
+red oxide of iron, which produces a red; oxide of cobalt, which gives
+a good blue; chromate of lead, which produces yellow; carbonate of
+copper, which gives a good dark green; and burnt umber, which yields
+a good brown. These come as dry powders and should be mixed with the
+dry cement and marble dust, making a mixture of uniform colour, before
+the water is applied. In order to determine the right colour it is
+well to experiment with a small quantity of the various ingredients
+until a satisfactory shade has been found. Then with this as a guide a
+sufficiently large quantity should be mixed, in the same proportions,
+to the consistency of a thick paste, and applied to the design, which
+has been previously cut in the surface to be decorated. To insure
+thorough adhesion of the paste to the concrete, the cutting should be
+well moistened with a wet brush. A number of suggestive designs are
+shown in the accompanying drawings.
+
+_Rustic Furniture._--The lighter out-door furniture can be easily made
+up in a great variety of designs. The form of rustic settles and chairs
+is determined largely by the material which is available. Very useful
+and ornamental effects are produced by using sticks cut from the tops
+or from branches of small trees. Birch saplings, easily found in the
+second growth of some wood lots, afford a good supply of material.
+It is not necessary that the sticks be straight; the natural crooks
+and notches are often very useful in bracing the framework. Chairs,
+settles, tables, standards for flower boxes, and other articles of
+furniture may be made out of this rough and unfinished material.
+
+[Illustration: A garden screen]
+
+_Lattice Work._--Trellises and garden screens have been made in an
+almost endless variety of forms. Among the most satisfactory is the
+plain lattice work in squares and rectangles. Its simplicity and
+evident durability are points in its favour. Experience proves also
+that vines and other plants needing support are readily adjusted
+to this form of trellis. The size of the stock required in making
+the right-angled lattice work depends upon the uses to be made of
+it. For a garden screen the uprights need to be of 2 × 2 inch stock
+and of any convenient length. End posts of 3 × 3 inch stock will be
+required, to give necessary stiffness; and, if the screen be a long
+one, intermediate posts of the same size should be placed at intervals
+of ten or twelve feet. The horizontal pieces may be strips of 7/8-inch
+stock, 2 inches wide, set their full thickness into the uprights.
+Spruce furring, which lumber dealers supply in 2-inch widths, is
+suitable for the small rails; but if chestnut be used for the uprights
+it is well to use the same wood for the rest of the construction. The
+top and bottom rails should be of heavier stock, not less than 2 by 3
+inches. The best foundation is a line of concrete posts, firmly set
+into the ground at intervals of 6 feet, to which the bottom rail or
+the uprights are fastened by means of irons set into the cement when
+the posts are formed. Two coats of dull green paint will protect the
+wood and properly subordinate the lattice work to the trailing branches
+which it supports.
+
+
+
+
+VIII
+
+FINISHING AND RE-FINISHING
+
+'Tis toil's reward that sweetens industry--_Ebenezer Elliot_
+
+
+In the commercial production of furniture the cabinet-maker has nothing
+to do with the finishing of his work. This essential part of furniture
+making is turned over to artisans who are finishers by trade. In a
+separate part of the factory they attend to the cleaning and filling of
+the wood and to whatever finish is applied to the work of the joiner.
+It is hardly necessary to add that the finishing of all kinds of
+woodwork is quite as important as any other feature in its production;
+for, however good the lines of design may be and however thoroughly the
+design may be carried out in the construction of any piece of furniture
+or other woodwork, it may be and often is spoiled as a work of art in
+the finishing.
+
+[Illustration: Finishing a Library Table. Plate VI]
+
+But the amateur cabinet-maker should be his own finisher. He should
+familiarize himself with the various kinds of finish that may be
+applied to the different woods. He should know the object of filling
+wood and how it is done. He should understand the processes of fuming,
+staining, and varnishing so well that he can produce with certainty the
+results desired.
+
+
+CLEANING, SURFACING, AND FILLING
+
+_First Steps in Finishing._--The first step in finishing woodwork is
+to clean it up and prepare it for the filler. Too great care cannot
+be taken in examining all surfaces for slight oversights that have
+occurred in the joinery work or for blemishes that have been acquired
+in any part of the process of construction. Light planing, chiselling,
+or scraping, and perhaps a little sand-papering, always with the grain,
+may be needed to remove these faults and blemishes. The most serious
+of these generally result from gluing. All surplus glue should be
+carefully removed, even to the film that soaks into the surface of the
+wood. The slightest spot of glue remaining will keep the filler out of
+the wood and show through any kind of finish.
+
+_Importance of Filling._--As soon as the furniture is thoroughly
+cleaned, if it is to be finished in the natural color, the grain of the
+wood must be filled with a light, transparent, semi-liquid substance,
+known as the filler, which, after standing from five to seven minutes,
+should be thoroughly rubbed off with a piece of coarse cloth or a
+handful of shavings. This process, as its name indicates, fills the
+pores of the wood and protects them against the absorption of moisture
+and the consequent swelling. But this is by no means its chief purpose.
+Strictly speaking, filling is the ground-work of all subsequent
+finishing processes and, for that reason, it may be said to be the most
+important operation connected with wood finishing. If improperly done,
+no amount of good work with the varnish brush will remove the fault. In
+fact, good work is impossible after a bad beginning. Good varnishing or
+good finishing of any kind requires that, before the final finishing
+processes begin, the surface should be made perfectly level and smooth,
+free from all unevenness or roughness or minute openings of any kind
+that might allow the varnish or other finishing material to penetrate
+the wood. If the filling has not been so thorough that no part of the
+subsequent finishing material can be absorbed by the wood, a rough
+surface will be sure to follow. This may, of course, be rubbed down and
+re-finished, but never with that perfection of result which is assured
+by laying a good foundation in correct filling. It may be set down as
+a fundamental principle of wood finishing that the best result is
+obtained when the filling or surfacing has been so thoroughly done that
+the thinnest of finishing coats, few in number, are required to produce
+the desired result.
+
+_Liquid Fillers or Surfaces._--There are many kinds of fillers in
+common use, but they may all be considered as belonging to one or the
+other of two classes. They are either liquid fillers or paste fillers.
+Woods differ greatly in the coarseness or fineness of their grain. The
+coarse or open-grained woods require a filler with body enough to close
+up the pores of the wood and give that perfectly even surface necessary
+as a foundation for good finishing. The close-grained woods, on the
+other hand, do not present the same filling problem. They could not
+absorb a paste filler. In fact, it is hardly too much to say that the
+fine, close-grained woods, like maple, gum wood, and birch, do not need
+a filler at all; and there are some coarse-grained woods, like southern
+or hard pine and cypress, the pores of which are naturally filled with
+gummy or resinous substances and will not absorb an artificial filler.
+But all such woods _do_ need to be given a finishing surface which will
+prevent the finishing coats from soaking into the fibre of the wood.
+This is the office of the so-called liquid fillers, which are very
+properly called "first coaters" or "surfacers."
+
+_How to Make a Liquid Filler._--A standard formula for the preparation
+of a liquid filler is as follows: Mix four parts by weight of carbonate
+of soda with six parts of china clay, and grind this mixture in about
+eight parts of japan, thinning the product with turpentine or benzine
+to the consistency of linseed oil. Laundry starch may be used in place
+of china clay, giving a filler which is somewhat easier of application
+than the clay filler because it does not settle. It lacks in
+durability, however, especially if it is not well covered. The finest
+grained woods do not require the addition of any material to the filler
+to give body. A great variety of liquids may be easily obtained which,
+without being mixed with anything, will give the necessary surface.
+
+Glue size, water glass, and the cheaper grades of varnish, thinned if
+necessary with benzine or turpentine, are often used for this purpose.
+But these are all inferior to the standard surfacers and never should
+be used on the best grades of woodwork. Shellac is always preferred
+as a first coater for hard pine, as it keeps the resinous sap in the
+pores of the wood and preserves the natural colour of the grain. If
+oil is applied to hard pine without first applying this protecting
+coat of shellac, the wood blackens with age. Shellac is an excellent
+first coater for other woods also. It is commonly used in house
+finishing as the surfacer for the interior trims. But it dries rapidly,
+and generally with a rough surface. The first coating of shellac,
+therefore, requires careful sand-papering before the varnish is put on.
+
+_Time Needed for a Shellac Coat to Dry._--It may be well to caution
+the amateur finisher as to the time required for the thorough drying
+of shellac. While it may be truly said to dry very rapidly, the first
+drying is necessarily upon the outer surface, forming a hard coating
+which delays somewhat the drying throughout, so that a shellac filling
+is not really dry enough to sand-paper a half hour or so after it has
+been applied, though it may appear to be. It is a good rule to allow at
+least twenty-four hours for thorough drying; and it may be well to add
+that all methods of filling, rubbing off, etc., require for the best
+results more time than energetic workers sometimes allow.
+
+_Cost of Surfacing._--A practical question that the amateur finisher
+will ask is, how can one know in advance how much filler is needed for
+given pieces of work, and what will be its cost? For a good quality
+of liquid filler it is safe to say that one pint will cover eight
+square yards with one coat. The cost varies greatly, depending upon
+the quality of the filler and whether it is home-made or obtained of a
+dealer. A good commercial filler or surfacer can be bought for $1.50
+per gallon, making the cost per square yard of one-coat surfacing about
+2-1/2 cents. A small can costs 15 cents. Good work cannot be done with
+the cheaper grades of filler. Shellac, which is, all in all, the best
+of surfacers, can be bought for $1.85 a gallon, which would make the
+cost of surfacing somewhat under 3 cents a square yard.
+
+_How to Make a Paste Filler._--A good paste filler, such as is required
+for the open-grained woods like oak, ash, baywood, and poplar or
+white wood, may be made from pulverized and floated silica as a base,
+thoroughly mixed with raw linseed oil, turpentine, and japan in equal
+parts, with enough silica added to the liquid mixture to form a good
+paste of a consistency somewhat thicker than paper-hangers' paste.
+If the mixture should prove to be a little too thick, it may easily
+be thinned with turpentine. The final mixing of this filler requires
+grinding in a hand mill. Unless a considerable quantity of it is needed
+it is quite as well to purchase a can of the paste filler of a dealer
+in painters' or finishers' supplies, though commercial fillers are
+not generally quite so good as a one made on this formula. They often
+contain wax and whiting and other materials as a base which are not so
+satisfactory in the long run as the floated silica.
+
+_How a Paste Filler is Applied._--Paste fillers should be spread on the
+surface to be filled very liberally with a wide, stiff brush, allowed
+to stand from five to seven minutes, and then rubbed off with a piece
+of burlap or a handful of fine shavings or excelsior. But it must not
+all be rubbed off or drawn out of the grain. This is an easy mistake
+for an inexperienced worker to make. The thing to do is to rub it in
+and at the same time leave the surfaces smooth. The surfaces should
+then be allowed to dry for about twenty-four hours before receiving the
+final finishing coats.
+
+
+VARNISHING
+
+The importance of a good foundation surface--even, smooth, and free
+from unsealed pores that would absorb and thus undermine the first coat
+of varnish--has been explained in the section on filling and surfacing.
+If this foundation has been well laid, the amateur finisher may enter
+upon the varnishing stage of his work with confidence; but he will
+soon learn that there is much call for skill in order to produce the
+desired results in this part of the finishing process. The selection,
+preparation, and application of varnish is a special calling, and great
+skill comes only as the result of experience; but certain main facts
+and principles are easily learned.
+
+_How a Good Varnish is Recognized._--It is hardly necessary to say
+that a superior varnish must be clear, transparent, and brilliant.
+These qualities are always associated with this kind of finish. But
+durability is also a necessary quality. An expert will, with his eyes
+shut, recognize a high-grade varnish by its peculiar odour, which is
+to him an agreeable one. He will at once detect inferior grades by the
+rank, sharp odour of resin and benzine used in their manufacture. The
+range of quality and cost in varnishes is probably greater and more
+varied than in any other finishing material. For fine, artistic work
+only the best varnish is allowable; and this may be bought for $3.00 a
+gallon.
+
+_"Sag" and How Corrected._--A good varnish flows easily from the brush,
+spreads evenly, and dries slowly, thus allowing plenty of time for its
+proper distribution over the surface. And time enough should be taken
+to apply an even coat which will not dry unequally and lead to cracking
+due to irregular contraction in the process of hardening. It is of
+the utmost importance that each coat be spread evenly over the surface
+when first applied. Great care should be taken not to brush long in
+one place. Re-brushing after a brief interval leaves brush marks which
+are objectionable. Unequal spreading on broad surfaces often causes
+the varnish to run or "sag." A tendency to sag may be brushed out if
+attended to promptly. But, if it is not noticed until the varnish has
+begun to set, the only way to prevent a bad blemish is to absorb the
+thickening parts of the coat by means of a partly dried brush; and this
+must not be attempted three or four minutes after the varnish has been
+put on. By that time it will have become quite well set and a sag will
+be beyond repairing by any simple means.
+
+_Time Required Between Varnish Coats._--The best varnishes, as has
+been stated, dry quite slowly, and they seem to dry and harden not, as
+shellac does, on the top first, but from the under surface outward.
+This peculiarity emphasizes the need of allowing sufficient time
+between coats. And it should be added that mere drying is not all
+that is required. Each coat must harden; and during the process of
+hardening slight movements take place throughout the mass of the coat
+until it becomes permanently set or hardened. The time required for
+this permanent setting or seasoning, as it may be called, varies with
+the character of the under coat, with the temperature of the room in
+which the finishing is done, and with the thickness of the varnish coat
+itself. Five days is usually thought to be a short seasoning period.
+As many weeks would not be too long for the best results. It is folly
+to attempt to hurry up a job of varnishing. In the nature of the case
+it cannot be hurried without yielding disastrous results. There is no
+other kind of work in which "haste makes waste" with the certainty that
+it does in varnishing. Great pains must be taken with each coat. Least
+of all should the under coats be slighted, for solidity and depth in
+the appearance of the finished surfaces depend upon there being plenty
+of evenly laid and well hardened varnish before the final or finish
+coat is applied. All this work should be done in a well-lighted room,
+free from dust, and with a good supply of fresh air, kept at an even
+temperature, of about 70 degrees--certainly not colder than this, since
+a lower temperature prevents varnish from spreading evenly.
+
+_Number of Coats Needed._--The number of coats of varnish required vary
+with the character of the work. What is known as piano finish requires
+from three to seven under coats of good elastic rubbing varnish, each
+well hardened and rubbed down to give under surfaces more even than the
+best brushing can give. In addition to these under coats a final finish
+coat is needed to give brilliancy and lustre.
+
+_How to Rub Down Varnish._--Rubbing down varnish is a unique and
+important part in the process of finishing. The beginning of the
+operation consists of long and persistent rubbing with pulverized
+pumice stone mixed with oil or with water, if the work is such that
+water would have no chance to soak into the pores of the wood.
+Whichever liquid is used, a rubbing pad will be found necessary.
+This is a block about 4 inches square, made of thick, loose cloth
+like felt or hair cloth. In use it is first moistened in the oil or
+water and then dipped into a box containing a quantity of powdered
+pumice. With this the varnished surface is rubbed vigorously, giving
+a circular movement to the pad in rubbing down the broad surfaces. As
+the smoothing progresses, less and less of the pumice powder is used.
+Near the end of the process enough will be found on the surface or
+adhering to the rubbing pad. What remains on the surface is finally
+all wiped off carefully with chamois skin, when it will be found that
+the surface has been levelled down but that it is covered with fine
+scratches due to the grains of the pumice. These are removed by a
+second rubbing in rotten stone and oil or water.
+
+_Dull Finish and Flat Varnish._--For many purposes good finishing
+requires but one under coat rubbed down and covered with a finish
+coat; and this finish coat is often not allowed to retain its natural
+lustre. For furniture a dull finish is much to be preferred. It is more
+durable, it harmonizes better with its surroundings, and it is more
+in keeping with the idea of simplicity and usefulness. In working for
+a dull finish it is not so essential to secure depth and evenness of
+surface as it is when a high lustre is required, and therefore fewer
+coats are necessary. In fact, a dull finish may be given to furniture
+without any varnish at all. Two or three coats of shellac, each well
+rubbed down, give a very satisfactory result. Wax finish, to be
+described later, gives beautiful effects. There are varnishes known as
+flat varnishes which give a dull finish without rubbing. They are made
+by dissolving beeswax in turpentine in the proportion of two ounces of
+the solid to a pint of the liquid, using moderate heat and mixing the
+wax solution while warm with four times the quantity of warm varnish.
+What is known as the old Dutch finish is obtained by using over the
+proper stain one coat of wax varnish. But there is no kind of dull
+finish so durable as that given by several coats of high-grade varnish,
+each well rubbed down.
+
+
+WAX FINISH
+
+_How to Prepare and Apply Finishing Wax._--The simplest and at the
+same time one of the most attractive methods of finishing woodwork is
+rubbing it with finishing wax. This is one of the old processes which
+has of late years been revived by the arts and crafts societies and
+is becoming deservedly popular. Finishing wax may be purchased ready
+for use or it may be made by dissolving yellow beeswax in turpentine
+in the proportion of two parts wax and one of turpentine. To do this
+the wax should be cut into small pieces or shavings, placed in a dish,
+and covered with the liquid. The solution may be hastened by heating
+in a water bath; but, if a gas flame be used for heating the water,
+care should be exercised to extinguish the flame before bringing the
+turpentine near, on account of the inflammable character of turpentine
+vapor. This mixture, which is too thick to spread with a brush, may
+be applied either hot or cold by means of a piece of soft cloth. Soft
+cloths, like clean cheese cloth, should be used also in rubbing. The
+rubbing should be continued for a considerable time, but it is by no
+means so tedious a process as the rubbing down of the several coats of
+varnish. Less rubbing is required if the wax is applied hot. One of the
+greatest advantages of the wax finish is that it may be quickly applied
+and immediately rubbed down, after which the furniture is ready for
+use. Filling and finishing are accomplished together. It is also easy
+to apply a fresh coat of wax at any time. In fact, it is desirable to
+re-finish new pieces of furniture in this way several times during the
+first few months of their use, and after that about once a year.
+
+
+STAINING
+
+_Object of Staining._--Up to this point the processes of finishing
+considered have assumed that the wood treated is to retain its natural
+colour, excepting that it may darken with age. But it is often
+desirable to give artificial colours to woodwork--_i. e._, to dye or
+stain it. This is done for a variety of purposes--to reduce to one tone
+the different shades of the natural colour often found in the same kind
+of wood, to bring out the natural beauty of the grain and texture, to
+give an entirely new colour to the cheaper kinds of wood in imitation
+of the more expensive kinds, and to produce tones that will harmonize
+with various colour schemes. To accomplish this great variety of
+results, scores of different kind of wood dyes or stains have been put
+upon the market in almost countless shades and tints, but they are all
+easily classified under three heads. They are oil stains, water stains,
+or alcohol stains.
+
+_A Perfect Stain._--A perfect stain, if it could be obtained, would
+be a clear, limpid liquid, free from all solid particles or specks of
+colouring matter that might clog the pores of the wood and interfere
+with the absorption of the filler--so clear and transparent that it
+would in no way obscure the grain of the wood, which in many varieties
+is the chief element of beauty--so limpid that it would easily soak
+deep into the pores of the wood, carrying to a considerable depth below
+the surface an artificial colour which will not fade on exposure.
+
+_Water, Alcohol, and Oil Stains Compared._--The water and alcohol
+stains on the whole meet these requirements better than the oil stains
+do. They are clear, and without body, and they have great penetration.
+But they are not free from faults. Many of the water stains are made
+from aniline dyes which are not durable. The alcohol stains, however,
+are generally permanent. Both the water stains and the alcohol stains
+raise the grain of the wood and are liable to show darker in corners
+and on end grains and to show laps from re-brushing. The oil stains,
+on the other hand, are free from these faults. They spread easily and
+evenly, they do not raise the grain, they do not double up or show
+laps or streaks, and they do not fade; but they have a few defects
+which overbalance these good qualities. They have considerable body
+which prevents them from penetrating equally all parts of the surface,
+so that they do not carry in the colouring as either the water or
+the alcohol stains do. Their oily nature causes them partly to close
+up the filaments of the wood and thus interfere with the subsequent
+process of filling. This is so bad a defect that oil stains are not
+to be recommended for open-grained woods, the fine finish of which
+depends so much on correct filling. They are more successful with the
+close-grained woods, which need only to be surfaced with shellac or the
+ordinary liquid filler.
+
+_How Stain is Applied._--If furniture or any kind of woodwork is to
+be artificially coloured, staining is the first of the finishing
+operations to be attended to. The stain should be spread upon
+well-cleaned surfaces by means of a brush, a cloth, or a sponge, and
+allowed to stand for a few minutes so that it may penetrate well into
+the wood. The surfaces should then be carefully wiped off with clean,
+soft cloths or cotton waste to remove any stain that may not have
+soaked into the wood, and thus prevent a streaked or painted effect.
+After the stained surface is thoroughly dry, a filler, coloured to
+match the stain, should be applied and rubbed well into the pores, as
+already explained in the section on natural finish. The beginner will
+need to be cautioned again and again not to rub the filler all off or
+draw it out of the grain, but to rub it in as much as possible. He
+will also need to be on his guard against the presence of moisture or
+grease, which will interfere with good results.
+
+Excellent prepared stains in great variety may be easily obtained of
+dealers in painters' supplies. They will not always produce the effects
+claimed for them, but with a little experimenting it is possible to
+find prepared stains that will give almost any desired result. They are
+somewhat expensive, however, and the amateur finisher may prefer to
+develop his own stain. Following are some suggestions along this line:
+
+_Asphaltum and Golden Oak Stain._--A good chocolate brown stain may
+be produced on almost any light-coloured wood by a very thin varnish
+made by colouring turpentine with asphaltum and applying with a brush.
+A considerable quantity of asphaltum should be used, but not enough
+to make a sticky liquid. This will need to be finished with shellac
+or finishing varnish. When applied to quartered oak it produces the
+beautiful effect known as golden oak. It may also be used on white wood
+to give an imitation of black walnut; and Georgia pine under this stain
+takes on a very attractive tone without obscuring the natural figure of
+the wood.
+
+_Mahogany._--A clever imitation of mahogany may be made by staining
+birch of the right grain with logwood stain. The stain is made by
+boiling together equal parts of logwood chips and water for about three
+hours. While the mixture is hot, chloride of tin is added gradually
+until the right shade of colour is produced. The stain should be
+allowed to cool before it is applied, and then several coats may be
+needed to secure the right depth of shade. The filler used should be
+coloured with burnt umber and sienna. The finish may be a brilliant or
+a flat varnish, or wax.
+
+_Baywood as Mahogany._--Mahogany stain is also applied to baywood,
+resulting in what commonly passes for real mahogany. The genuine
+article, however, is an imported wood coming from South America,
+Mexico, and Africa in several varieties; and it is a much harder wood
+than the American baywood imitation. Both the birch and the baywood
+imitations of mahogany may be so well stained and finished that it is
+difficult to distinguish them from the imported varieties.
+
+_Flemish Oak._--The various oak stains are worthy of special mention.
+Flemish oak finish is very dark, almost black. It is prepared by first
+applying a stain made of bichromate of potash dissolved in water in
+the proportion of one half pound of bichromate to a gallon of water.
+The solution should be strained and applied with a stiff brush. After
+drying, the surface is well sand-papered and a coat of thin black stain
+is applied, made by dissolving japan drop-black in turpentine. This is
+allowed to stand a few minutes, then wiped off, and when the surface
+is thoroughly dry a coat of thin shellac is applied. After a thorough
+drying and hardening the surface is smoothed down with fine sand-paper
+and finished with wax.
+
+_Mission Oak._--The so-called mission oak finish may be in several
+colours, but as a rule it is of a dull gray with the flakes slightly
+reddish. The stain is made from drop-black in oil, tinged with a
+little rose pink, and thinned with japan and turpentine. The mixture
+should be strained through cheese cloth and applied with a staining
+brush. Wax finish is invariably used for mission oak.
+
+_Forest Green Oak._--Forest green oak is among the best of the green
+effects in this wood. The stain is made by mixing two parts of chrome
+green with one part of chrome yellow for the colouring material.
+This is added to a mixture of three parts turpentine and one of raw
+linseed oil, with a little white japan. The resulting stain should be
+somewhat thinner than linseed oil. After this has been applied to the
+oak surface, rubbed in and dried, it is given a coat of thin shellac
+coloured with tumeric and a very little green aniline. This should have
+a wax finish.
+
+_Gray Oak._--A gray stain may be given to oak by a solution of iron
+sulphate, made by dissolving a small quantity of chemically pure
+crystals in water, and giving the solution a strongly acid quality by
+adding a little sulphuric acid. This solution is most conveniently
+used by placing it in a box tank large enough to contain the pieces of
+wood to be stained, as they must soak in the solution until they are
+thoroughly saturated. The pieces may be kept separate by stout cords
+tied around them, and they may be held under the solution by means of
+weights. When taken out they should be allowed to dry before they are
+rubbed down.
+
+_Weathered Oak._--Weathered oak stain is made by taking two ounces
+of copperas and the same quantity of dry tannin, dissolving them
+separately in about a quart of water, and when thoroughly dissolved
+mixing them together. When applied to oak it gives it the natural
+weathered tone with a slight bluish cast. It may then be oiled,
+shellaced and finished with a flat varnish or wax.
+
+_Fumed Oak and Chestnut._--But the most satisfactory method of giving
+a brown tone to furniture or other woodwork, is without question, by
+fuming with ammonia, though this process is limited to two woods,
+viz., white oak and chestnut. All other woods, including red oak, are
+deficient in tannic acid, the essential element to combine with the
+ammonia gas in the production of the stain. This method requires a
+fuming box of sufficient dimensions to contain the article of furniture
+to be fumed. It must be carefully constructed with all its joints
+made vapour proof by pasting over them strips of paper and covering
+them with shellac. The top or one side of the box should be fastened
+with screws, so that it may be vapour proof when the box is in use
+and yet easily removed. The operation of fuming consists simply in
+placing the furniture in the box with one or more shallow pans filled
+with the strongest ammonia--not the household ammonia, which is too
+weak--screwing the top or cover on, and allowing the apparatus to stand
+from 12 to 24 hours, according to the shade desired. If the fuming box
+be provided with small glass windows in its adjacent corners, a good
+light will be thrown across the furniture so that the development of
+colour may be observed without opening the box. When the desired shade
+has been obtained and the furniture removed, it is best to give it a
+good wax finish which will develop a beautiful velvety texture.
+
+_Peculiarities of Fumed Finish._--It will be observed that the toning
+of quartered oak by the fuming process develops the beauty of the grain
+far better than any other process of staining; and there should also
+be noted the still more remarkable fact that the contrasts of tone are
+the reverse of those given by staining; _i. e._, the parts that appear
+lighter in the one case are the darker parts in the other. This gives
+a certain distinction to the fumed finish and furnishes a means of
+detecting that which is not genuine.
+
+
+WHITE ENAMEL
+
+A vivid and very effective finish for furniture as well as for the
+trim of some rooms is white enamel. It is used on new work and also
+in re-finishing old furniture and other woodwork. In the latter
+case the old finish, whatever it may be, must be removed and the
+surfaces thoroughly sand-papered. But whether the wood be old or
+not, a satisfactory enamel finish cannot be produced by using the
+white varnish alone, since, like all other varnishes, it is somewhat
+transparent. It is necessary, first, to coat the wood with flat
+white--a paint made of white lead with some zinc oxide for hardening
+and thinned with turpentine. Oil should not be used in any part of
+the process. Three coats of this paint will generally be needed to
+produce the right surface for the final finish. Each of these coats
+should be allowed to dry and become well hardened. Two or three days,
+better still a week, should be allowed for hardening between coats,
+since insufficient hardening leads to cracks in the subsequent coats
+and develops a tendency to chip off. When a surface is ready for the
+enamel, only one coat of it should be applied, and that should be given
+not less than one week to harden before it is exposed to wear. Enamel
+is simply a good varnish coloured with zinc oxide ground in varnish. It
+may be thinned, if necessary, with turpentine, and it is applied with a
+brush like any other varnish.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+
+Problems in filling and finishing were developed in the series of
+furniture making problems in Chapter VII. It is only necessary
+to bring forward the unfinished work there described and apply to it
+the finishing methods outlined in this chapter. Our problems are,
+therefore, the following:
+
+_The Knock-down Bookcase._--If made up in white wood it may, like its
+original, be stained in imitation of black walnut and waxed. It may,
+however, be of oak, ash, or cherry, and finished to harmonize with the
+furniture with which it is to be used.
+
+_The Hanging Book Rack._--In the design for this rack it was suggested
+that it might be made of white wood and given a white enamel finish, or
+of baywood with a mahogany stain and varnish.
+
+_The Umbrella Stand._--Oak was advised for this piece of furniture. It
+needs to be treated with a paste filler and given two coats of varnish,
+well rubbed down.
+
+_The Magazine Stand._--Oak was suggested for this stand. The color will
+depend upon the surroundings. Filling and varnishing will be required
+if it be given a liquid stain, and wax finish if it be fumed.
+
+_The Light Library Table._--Oak was mentioned as a very appropriate
+wood for this table, but some lighter wood like ash may be used. It
+will be remembered that all open-grained woods require treatment with a
+paste filler before they are finished.
+
+_The Heavy Library Table._--As this was designed in the mission style,
+oak was chosen as the most suitable wood. It may be given the so-called
+mission oak stain and a wax finish.
+
+_The Round Centre Table._--This may be made in any of the woods
+commonly used for furniture, but quartered oak was mentioned. A golden
+oak finish will be found very satisfactory.
+
+_The Bookcase with Glazed Doors._--This may be made up in ash, in
+quartered oak, or in gum wood. The finish will depend upon the kind of
+wood used and the furniture with which it is to be associated.
+
+_The Library Desk and the Morris Chair._--The originals were made in
+quartered oak, fumed, and waxed.
+
+_The Hall Clock._--This may be made in quartered oak and given a
+weathered oak stain and wax finish.
+
+
+RE-FINISHING OLD FURNITURE
+
+There is nothing that affords more satisfaction to one looking for
+pleasing effects in household fittings than the occasional piece of
+genuine old furniture repaired and re-finished. Some of the rare old
+colonial designs are of exceptional merit. This is proved by the high
+prices which they often command. These designs originated in the days
+of the genuine hand crafts, before the invention of machine-made,
+cheap furniture. The work of the older designers was characterized
+by a certain individuality which gave it artistic value; and the
+craftsmen who worked out these designs did their work with such care
+and thoroughness that what they produced has had a lasting quality. It
+is for these reasons that we find it still in existence and so much
+desired.
+
+_Caution as to Repairs._--In the work of renovating old furniture,
+problems are met which are very different from those which have to be
+considered in the production of new work. All questions of design are
+settled. There is generally enough of the original article to show what
+the design was. The problem is one of restoration; we must supply
+the missing parts and re-finish the whole. The first thing to do,
+therefore, with any piece of genuine antique furniture is to look it
+over carefully from the point of view of the cabinet-maker, note its
+defects, supply the missing or loosened parts, and mend the breaks. It
+will be found that the wood is generally exceedingly dry and brittle on
+account of its age, and that it will therefore need to be handled more
+carefully than new wood; and, in matching up, it will often be found
+desirable to make use of parts of other old pieces rather than to add
+new wood to the old. This is especially true of veneering, which cannot
+be well matched in any other way. Old bits of veneer, on the other
+hand, may be so deftly fitted into the spaces where they are needed
+that the grafting is entirely obscured by subsequent finishing.
+
+_Scraping._--After the necessary repairs have been made, the next
+thing to be done is to remove the old finish. If the varnish is dry
+and brittle and somewhat cracked, it may be removed by means of a
+well-sharpened scraper, great care being taken, however, not to
+injure the wood surface, especially at the corners and edges. If the
+scraper does not take off the varnish well at certain points, fine
+sand-papering may be resorted to. It is generally wise, also, to give
+the entire surface a light sand-papering before it is cleaned up for
+finishing.
+
+_The Varnish Remover._--It often happens, however, that the scraper
+will not accomplish the desired result. In that case the liquid varnish
+remover is necessary. This may be found at the paint stores. The best
+formulas for producing these varnish and paint removers are known only
+to the manufacturers. It is therefore not wise for the young finisher
+to attempt to make his own remover. He should provide himself with a
+can of it and a bristle brush with which to apply it to the furniture.
+After putting on a good coat he should let it remain a few minutes
+and then try to scrape off the softened finish with a putty knife.
+If it doesn't come off readily, it should stand a little longer. The
+amount of time required depends entirely upon the hardness of the old
+finish. But in due time it will become soft and can be very quickly and
+effectually removed. A putty knife, however, will not remove it all.
+After scraping off as much as possible from the plain surfaces and from
+the corners, a careful washing with turpentine or benzine will clean
+off what remains. It is of the greatest importance that none of the old
+varnish nor any of the varnish remover should be permitted to remain.
+Either of them will show through the finish as stains on the broad
+surfaces and collect in the corners when the new finish is put on.
+
+_Re-finishing._--The re-finishing process is much like that described
+for new work, the chief exception being that there is generally no need
+of filling unless it has been found necessary to add new wood in making
+the repairs. Generally speaking, the re-finishing begins with the
+surfacing, which may be done with thin shellac coloured to match the
+stain of the furniture. This is sand-papered lightly before receiving
+the one or more coats of finishing varnish necessary to produce the
+desired effect. Very often all that is needed is a well rubbed down wax
+finish.
+
+
+PROBLEM: RE-FINISHING AN ANTIQUE MAHOGANY TABLE
+
+The table with which this problem deals was found in an old furniture
+shop among a large number of pieces probably of equal antiquity but
+of poor design; for all old furniture was not conceived on beautiful
+lines. Much of it was quite as ugly as some of the modern furniture.
+This table, however, when separated from the rubbish which almost
+concealed it, was found to have good proportions, with simple but
+graceful elements designed to make it useful as well as attractive. It
+was a drop-leaf table, the leaves being cut in with a double curve at
+each of the four corners. The legs were of turned stock and fluted,
+terminating in brass thimbles with casters. One leg was broken off, one
+of the leaves had broken away entirely from its hinges and the other
+was partly broken, the table top had received some hard knocks, and
+the entire surface was so begrimed with dust and dirt that it was with
+difficulty that one could tell the kind of wood of which the table was
+made. It took some imagination to conceive the possibilities which lay
+in this much abused and dilapidated old relic.
+
+The first thing to do was to wipe off the dust and dirt as well as
+possible with a damp sponge. The part of the top that remained on the
+frame was then removed so that the repairs could be easily made. The
+broken leg was replaced by boring each of the broken parts and setting
+them together with a 3/4-inch dowel, glued in. The brass tips and
+casters were removed and set aside to be burnished. The missing parts
+of the top were replaced by new pieces of baywood, fitted in, glued,
+and stained to match the original wood. After the necessary repairs had
+been made the entire table was treated with varnish remover and the
+old finish scraped off with a putty knife. This part of the process
+was completed by washing all the surfaces thoroughly with turpentine,
+carefully picking out with a pointed knife from corners, cracks, and
+openings of any kind, all remnants of the old finish and of the varnish
+remover. After carefully wiping off the results of this treatment with
+clean cheese cloth all the broad surfaces were then smoothed off with
+fine sand-paper. It was found that the wood was well filled, so that
+all it now needed was a final finishing with wax. The transformation
+from the begrimed old table found in the shop to a graceful and
+beautiful article of antique furniture was complete.
+
+
+
+
+IX
+
+HAND WEAVING
+
+ And Aphrodite came to comfort them
+ With incense, luscious honey, and fragrant wine;
+ And Heré gave them beauty of face and soul
+ Beyond all women; purest Artemis
+ Endowed them with her stature and white grace;
+ And Pallas taught their hands to flash along
+ Her famous looms.
+
+ The "Daughters of Pandarus" (from the "Odyssey," Lib. XX).
+ Translation by Mrs. Browning.
+
+
+Among the home industries which the arts and crafts societies have
+lately revived, perhaps none invite more interest or deserve greater
+honour than weaving with the hand loom. Weaving is an ancient art. If
+we were to seek its origin we should have to go back to the time when
+men adopted homespun clothing in place of rude coverings made from the
+skins of animals. That was a great change, for it meant the beginning
+not only of the textile industries but of civilization itself. It is no
+wonder that the distaff and the loom were highly honoured in ancient
+mythologies. Not less honour is due the spinning wheels and looms
+of our grandmothers, which played an important part in the early
+beginnings of our own history. The New England colonists spoke with
+pride of communities which showed progress in the weaving of cloth;
+and this was then largely a home industry in the hands of honourable
+women. It was a work of necessity, but not without love and devotion.
+Many evidences remain in beautiful coverlets or bedspreads, in towels
+of homespun flax, in durable linen sheets and table-cloths--examples
+of unfailing patience, great ingenuity, and marvellous skill--handed
+down from generation to generation to their present fortunate and proud
+possessors.
+
+[Illustration: Weaving a Rug. Plate VII]
+
+_The Primitive Loom._--In the Orient, where our choicest rugs are made,
+two trees growing near each other, some strings and pieces of bamboo,
+and a few simple accessories, are all the worker requires. This is a
+primitive loom. The modern hand loom is the same in principle; and the
+looms of our factories do not differ from it essentially. While it is
+true that their productive power has been enormously multiplied, this
+great improvement, which was actually one of the chief causes of a
+great industrial revolution, was due mainly to the inventive genius of
+two men who harnessed the motive powers of nature to the English hand
+looms.
+
+[Illustration: Shuttle and bobbin]
+
+_Warp and Woof._--The fundamental process in all weaving is essentially
+the same; and it is exceedingly simple. It consists in passing one set
+of threads between two other sets of threads which cross each other
+alternately and are moved first up and then down to allow the passage
+of the shuttle with its bobbin and thread. The set of threads which
+cross each other and which, by being moved up and down, interlock the
+thread which is passed between them, is known as the _warp_. The thread
+which the shuttle carries across and between the warp threads is called
+the _woof_. By careful selection of materials, by skilful design in the
+dyeing and arrangement of these materials, and by proper management of
+the warp and woof to express the design, the most beautiful Oriental
+rugs are fashioned; and, though we may not be able to reproduce these
+in our homes, very beautiful and very useful things may be made upon
+the hand loom by those who have the necessary enthusiasm and patience.
+
+[Illustration: The hand loom]
+
+[Illustration: The reed]
+
+_What the Hand Loom is._--The hand loom consists of four uprights or
+posts, joined on two sides at the top and bottom by cross pieces.
+Attached to the lower cross piece are two other uprights, one on each
+side of the loom, bolted in such a manner as to give free play back
+and forth. This is the beater. These cross pieces are grooved on their
+inner edges, and into this groove is slipped the reed, which is a frame
+divided into sections by short, stiff wires, making from 10 to 25 or
+more sections to the inch. It is called a reed because it was formerly
+made from reeds. The sections of the reed are called dents, and through
+each one is to be threaded a single strand of the warp. From the upper
+cross pieces extend two other uprights, one on each side, to a height
+of about two feet above the general framework. They are united at
+the top by a round piece called the roll, over which, near each end,
+are passed cords attached to pulleys which in turn carry other cords
+fastened by means of screw eyes to inch-wide sticks extending across
+the width of the loom. These sticks are in pairs and carry cords or
+wires of uniform length through the centre of each of which a thread
+of the warp is passed by means of an eye in each wire, as through the
+dent of the reed. This is called the harness. There must be at least
+two of them, and there may be more. Two are necessary for the simplest
+weaving of a plain surface, and more than two if the work is to be more
+complex, as is required for scarfs with fancy borders, cushions, or
+any figured products of the loom. Near each end of the loom are two
+rollers to which the two ends of the warp threads are attached when the
+loom is set up for weaving. These rollers are called beams. Over one of
+them the woven product passes as the loom is operated, while the other
+holds the unwoven warp. At the back of the loom is still another cross
+piece, underneath which pedals are fastened. These pedals connect by
+chains with the harnesses in such a manner that when the foot is placed
+on one of them the cords attached to it play over the pulleys, throwing
+the harness and the warp threads which it carries below the level of
+the other set or sets of warp threads. An ingenious device of cogs at
+the side of the loom holds the work taut and enables the worker to let
+out fresh warp and also to roll up completed work.
+
+
+THE PROCESS
+
+_Preparing the Warp._--When the essential parts of the hand loom and
+their uses are understood, the amateur weaver is prepared to make ready
+the warp and attach it to the machine. The thread or warp is taken
+from spools or cones, four threads at one time, which constitute what
+is called a bout. After determining how many threads will be required,
+allowing so many threads to form one inch of the woven cloth, the
+operator must decide how wide her warp is to be and how long. With the
+width, the length, and the number of threads to the inch in mind, she
+proceeds to wind upon her warping bars or frame the requisite amount
+until she has it all in one great skein. In putting this upon the bars
+or frames she should be very careful to cross each bout--_i. e._, each
+four threads--so that one bout shall go above and one below, in order
+to allow the introduction of a pair of sticks, called lease-sticks or
+leash-sticks. These attachments keep the order of the threads so that
+they may be drawn into the harness in the same order in which they are
+wound on the beam.
+
+_Warping the Loom._--To warp the loom the operator loosens one end of
+the skein and, passing it from the warping bars to the loom, attaches
+it to the roller or beam at the back of the loom, after carefully
+dividing it so that it may be evenly distributed. At this point an
+attachment called a rake is firmly fastened to the loom by cords and a
+certain number of threads placed in each division. By the aid of the
+lease-sticks, which are inserted, and with the assistance of a second
+person to hold the skein firm, the threads are wound upon the beam. The
+rake is now removed and the worker proceeds to set up the piece.
+
+[Illustration: Warping hook]
+
+_Drawing in the Warp._--As has already been explained, two harnesses
+only will need to be used for simple weaving. Taking the first bout
+of four threads, the weaver draws the first thread through the centre
+of the first loop in the first harness, or the one to which the
+right-hand pedal is attached. The next thread is put through the centre
+of the first loop of the second harness, or the one attached to the
+left-hand pedal. The third is drawn through the second loop of the
+harness connected with the right-hand pedal, and the fourth, in turn,
+through the second loop of the harness attached to the left-hand pedal.
+Great care must be exercised that no mistakes are made; for a single
+misplaced thread means that the work of drawing in must be all done
+over again. A special kind of hook is used to assist in drawing in the
+warp. When the drawing in is completed properly, the operator begins
+at the right-hand side of the loom and, measuring the reed, allows
+one half the width of web from the centre of the reed and draws each
+thread through each dent in regular order. When this is done it is only
+necessary to connect the warp threads to the canvas of the beam by
+means of heavier threads which hold the warp out in the loom, test the
+work, and proceed joyously with the weaving.
+
+_Beating Up the Woof._--The weaver presses the right-hand pedal, and
+every alternate thread separates from the other, leaving a space
+between the two sets of warp threads for the shuttle to be thrown from
+right to left, carrying the woof threads through. The operator then
+draws this thread up at the side to make a good selvedge and brings
+home the beater, thus pressing the woof into the warp. A sheer fabric
+requires a light stroke of the beater, while firm cloth requires more
+force. Releasing the right pedal, the operator presses the left, which
+causes the warp threads to cross, holding more firmly the woof threads
+just thrown. The shuttle now passes from left to right, carrying
+through another woof thread which, in turn, is beaten up as before. So
+the work goes merrily on with the throws of the shuttle alternating
+from right to left and from left to right, interspersed with the
+strokes of the beater.
+
+[Illustration: Hand-Made Towels. Plate VIII]
+
+
+PROBLEM: MAKING A RUG
+
+_The Design._--This problem, like all others in house decoration,
+involves in its initial stages questions of design. Before
+planning the rug it is necessary to know what use the rug is to
+have--whether it is to be for a hall, a living room, a dining-room,
+or a chamber, and whether it is to be used upon hard wood floors or
+with a carpet. This is a question of colours, and of materials; for
+the designer must avoid too sharp contrasts in colour, not only in
+the rug itself but in its relation to the other colours with which
+it should harmonize, and the materials used must not display glaring
+inconsistencies of texture. Unless the beginner has special talent as
+a colourist it is not wise to attempt the introduction of too many
+colours in one piece of work. If the warp is dark it is usually better
+to use light or medium woof. If several shades are used in the body of
+the rug, better results are obtained by using for the border or end
+decoration one or more plain colours which match or readily blend with
+the principal colours of the body of the rug.
+
+[Illustration: Hand-Made Rugs. Plate IX]
+
+_Materials: Denim._--There are many materials suitable for rug making.
+Denim in moss or forest green makes a rug fit for a queen. This should
+be woven on a blue or green warp thread of carpet size. In preparing
+the woof it will be necessary to cut the denim on a true bias into
+strips from 1/2 to 3/4 of an inch wide. The latter width is better.
+In cutting, the best method is to fold back one corner of a square cut
+end along the selvedge, forming a fold across the cloth at an angle of
+45 degrees. Crease this fold carefully and make the first cut along
+the fold. With a yardstick or a straight edge of some kind rule off
+lightly with a piece of chalk or soft pencil strips of the proper width
+for the succeeding cuts, taking great pains to maintain a true bias.
+When a sufficient amount has been cut, the pieces should be ravelled
+or fringed on each edge by drawing them quickly through a button
+hook. There is a certain knack in this, but it is soon acquired. The
+fringed strips should then be fastened together at the ends by means
+of overhand stitching, trimming off neatly all projecting corners. The
+moss-like effect when woven is improved if the woof, as soon as it is
+prepared, is not rolled into balls but left in suitable lengths for
+filling the shuttle. A special form of shuttle without a bobbin or
+spool is used for carrying the woof cloth for rug weaving. Its simple
+construction is shown in the illustration. The woof is wound endwise
+and unwound in weaving by turning the shuttle.
+
+[Illustration: Shuttle for woof cloth]
+
+Another good material for rug making is found in various kinds of
+woollen cloth. Warm, durable, and handsome effects may be obtained by
+using a gray wool with catawba or some other warm shade of red as the
+end decoration, with set figures for the body of the rug. Geometric
+designs, arrows, swastika, the pine tree, and many other forms are
+possible. Very dainty colours also may be combined in rugs for chamber
+use. Materials for these may be obtained from worn lawn dresses,
+discarded silkaleen and mull, which work up beautifully with one or two
+plain colours reserved for use in the borders.
+
+_Combination of Blue and White._--Blue and white is always a happy
+combination; and exceedingly dainty creations may be woven, to be
+placed perhaps in the guest chamber, by using a woof of old blue with
+a white warp, combined with white borders and a white knotted fringe.
+A vine-like effect may be obtained in the border by twisting blue and
+white together in opposite ways and weaving in a plain thread of white
+or blue between the two. Another happy combination of blue and white
+results from weaving on a blue warp a woof of white outing flannel, cut
+and fringed as described for the moss rug of denim, with a border of
+old blue and figures of the same colour. For a chamber or for a bath
+room in white such a rug as this will leave nothing to be desired.
+
+_A Weaving Design._--It has just been said that design in rug making is
+a question of colours and of materials. It is already apparent that it
+is more than that. It is largely a question of procedure in the process
+of weaving. That this is so may be shown in the following account of
+the making of a blue and white rug. The thought was to produce a rug
+with five stripes of blue running lengthwise, with white figures at
+regular intervals through the middle of the rug. To accomplish this
+result two threads of white warp were removed from the reed and harness
+every two inches for a space of ten inches on each side, thus making
+what may be called a weaving design; for the blue stripes, it will be
+easily seen, had to appear to the number of five on each side when the
+rug was woven. The white figures were formed by first throwing the
+blue cloth or woof through the warp by the usual throw of the shuttle
+and, before beating it up, threading into the warp white cloth in the
+desired pattern, after which the woof and pattern were beaten up
+together. For the pattern five threads or pieces of white cloth were
+used, two of which were 6 inches in length and three 2 inches, the two
+longer ones being placed between the shorter ones as illustrated. A
+space of 7 inches was left between the white figures, the location of
+which was carefully determined by counting the threads, both of warp
+and of woof, so that in weaving the figures should appear at the right
+place. The result of this weaving design was a very beautiful rug.
+
+[Illustration: White figure in blue rug]
+
+_Another Example of Weaving Design._--This feature of rug designing
+is capable of indefinite expansion. Perhaps one more example may be
+given. The object was to produce a rug of medium dark centre with an
+8-inch border all around of a darker colour. This effect was produced
+by first weaving 8 inches of the dark end border, which was of mixed
+goods showing several dark colours contrasting happily. Having reached
+the place where the medium centre was to begin, a woof thread of this
+medium colour and of the right length was joined each time to short
+pieces of woof of the border colour so that, as the weaving progressed
+along the length of the centre, not only the centre colour appeared
+in its proper place but 8 inches of border on each side. When the
+proper length of the centre had been woven, the rug was finished by
+weaving another 8 inches of the border colour. The result was a rug of
+individuality and charm.
+
+_Great Variety of Material._--Endless combinations will occur to any
+one who becomes interested in this captivating art. The field for
+colour design is almost without limit. No material is so old and
+useless as to be despised by the clever rug maker. Old bed ticking
+with its blue and white stripes cut on the bias makes a very desirable
+combination when woven on a blue warp with a plain blue border. A
+charming mottled effect in one instance was produced by a yarn which
+was ravelled from an old raw silk portière of a mahogany shade and
+wound into balls with finely cut strips of tan cloth, the balls being
+rewound several times. This was used as the woof for the centre of
+the rug. The border was made of a weaving thread of the unravelled
+mahogany yarn, doubled several times to give thread of a size equal
+to that of the tan cloth. Discarded clothing in which the prevailing
+colours are red, when made up into woof threads and woven on a white
+warp, gives a charming effect which may be strengthened or toned down
+by a border combination as desired. Dyes may, of course, be used if the
+colours of the weaving threads made up from old cloths and discarded
+clothing are not suited to the design that is to be worked out.
+
+_Weaving the Rug._--When the design for the rug has been thoroughly
+worked out, determining the colours, materials to be used, and
+the method of procedure, the warp and the woof threads should be
+prepared and the warp attached to the loom, as already explained in
+the discussion of the general process of weaving. Further details of
+procedure are not needed here. The thing to do is to weave a rug as
+designed. The next thing to do is to design and weave another rug, and
+then another and so on. As in most crafts so in weaving, experience
+is the great teacher--a teacher who demands faithful work, who finds
+lessons of value in every failure and abundant satisfaction in every
+success. Some of these successes were found in the rugs illustrated
+opposite page 252.
+
+Rug weaving is probably the simplest of all weaving and therefore
+a good problem with which to begin. After serving a satisfactory
+apprenticeship in this field the amateur will have acquired sufficient
+knowledge of design and sufficient skill in the art to pass to more
+difficult problems. This will take her out into a large field of
+opportunity. Portières, window draperies, table scarfs, bedspreads,
+and covers for pillows and cushions in endless variety will suggest
+themselves to the ambitious worker. In all these, as has been seen in
+the case of rug making, design is all important. The management of the
+loom is much the same in all plain weaving. What differences there
+are will be found, for the most part, in the weaving designs. In the
+following problems are described some of the special features involved
+in the other forms of weaving.
+
+
+PROBLEM: PORTIÈRES AND COUCH COVERS
+
+_Suggestions for the Design._--If the loom is wide enough these may
+be woven in one piece; but usually it is necessary to weave them in
+sections or breadths. In this case, of course, they must be afterward
+neatly joined. The possibilities in colour design are naturally varied.
+They may be woven with a woof of plain colour contrasting with the
+colour of the warp, in stripes, or with plain centres with striped
+ends. Harmony of colour effects is always to be sought. Depth and
+richness may sometimes be obtained to a highly satisfactory degree by a
+generous use of black. Materials may be yarns, bits of silk or velvet,
+or pieces of fine, soft woollen goods. The warp may be silk or linen
+or mercerized cotton. Beautiful portières have been woven by leaving
+out two threads of warp at regular intervals, giving a loose and fluffy
+effect. Silk and wool pieces may be used in the woof, alternating
+with one or more threads of wool yarn of any desired shade; and, if
+of the same colour as the warp used, they will impart a very decided
+tone to the whole product. In portières, the general appearance is
+much improved if the woof is not beaten up hard into the warp. The
+soft beating gives a resulting texture that is more pliable and more
+suitable for hanging in easy folds such as is demanded in portières.
+Couch covers, however, which will have to resist more wear and tear,
+should be beaten up harder. In preparing the silk and wool pieces the
+cloth should be cut into very fine strips, joined by carefully lapping
+the ends, and, by cutting away a part of the cloth, making the joint
+uniform in size. If the material is cloth of ordinary thickness 1/2
+an inch is quite wide enough for strips. The length of the pieces used
+may vary greatly, though they may be somewhat different in colour. They
+may vary all the way from a few inches to a length long enough to weave
+an inch in the portière or cover. This makes it very easy to secure
+a source of supply for the material in saving old garments and short
+pieces of cloth for the specific purpose of making up the woof threads
+for these products of the loom. Almost any household will be able to
+save enough in a short time to furnish the material for a beautiful
+pair of portières or a couch cover which will be durable in quality,
+easy to clean, attractive in colour, and satisfactory from every point
+of view.
+
+
+PROBLEM: WINDOW DRAPERIES AND CURTAINS
+
+_The Design._--Curtains of one colour or of several are woven on the
+simple loom with two harnesses. They may be of the soft cream tint,
+the material for which is easily obtained and the effect of which, in
+softening the light passing through them, leaves little to be desired.
+But if a little colour be required, the weaving design may be easily
+changed to secure this result. One may, for example, weave at first 7
+inches of the plain cream. This will give woven material enough for
+a 2-inch hem at the bottom of the curtain and 5 inches before the
+beginning of a coloured border. The border may consist of two threads
+of colour alternating with two threads of the cream, thus making a
+stripe of about 7 inches in width. Following this may come 8 to 10
+inches of the plain cream, followed in turn by a narrow stripe of the
+same colour as the border, 3 inches wide, in turn followed by another
+10 inches of the plain cream and another narrow stripe, and so on,
+alternately, until the required length of the curtain has been woven.
+If desired, a top border may be woven in, though it is well to make it
+somewhat narrower than the one at the bottom--say about 5 inches--and
+it must be added so that it will show below the hem. In any case the
+top of the curtain should be woven plain, allowing for hemming, and
+also for shirring if a rod is to be inserted for hanging the curtain.
+Vertical stripes are often desirable in curtains, especially if the
+room is so low studded as to invite the employment of every possible
+means for making it seem higher. Such stripes may be made by using two
+colours for the warp--as, for example, blue and white or green and
+white--with one of these colours as woof.
+
+[Illustration: An Alcove With Window Draperies, Pillow Covers, Window
+Seat Cover, Chair Seat and Moss Green Rug. All Hand Woven]
+
+_Importance of Selecting Good Warp._--The successful working out
+of this problem depends very largely upon the proper selection of
+materials. While many things may be used for warp with a certain
+degree of success, there are fine points to be observed in weaving as
+in all the art-crafts, and the real beauty of the result depends upon
+giving due attention to these points. It is always well to remember
+that in all weaving the warp plays a most important part. Mercerized
+cotton warp works out effectively with silk or linen woof or with a
+combination of both, and retains its beauty after being laundered many
+times. In the soft cream shade it has almost the appearance of silk,
+at a much less cost. But silk may often be obtained at a low price
+if the weaver lives in the neighbourhood of a silk mill. Bargains in
+small lots of unsalable colours may be secured with which the weaver
+may do wonders; and if the colours are not good the silk may be dyed
+at small expense. Our grandmothers saved their tea grounds for a week
+or more, boiled them, and made a dye which gave a beautiful gray warp.
+They were, in fact, very particular about their warping threads. Not
+everything would suit them. They learned from experience that the
+wearing quality of goods is improved by having the warp stronger and
+harder twisted than the filling. It was common for them to spin a
+certain thread for this purpose. Exquisite results follow the use of
+a fine linen warp in white or natural colour with linen or silk for
+filling. Striking and beautiful also, in its way, is the very coarse
+linen warp.
+
+_Variety in Woof Threads._--A very pleasing effect in sash curtains
+or in full length window draperies is produced by weaving heavy
+threads alternately with fine threads, using two shuttles or bobbins,
+one holding the heavy thread and the other the fine one. Two or more
+threads may be alternated in this way as the fancy of the designer
+prompts; and this style of weaving may be confined to borders, leaving
+the body of the fabric plain, or the borders may be woven of the solid,
+heavy threads and the body of the curtains or draperies ribbed with the
+alternate coarse and fine threads. Such curtains are very beautiful in
+cream white; but colour may be used if the colours are fast so that the
+curtains may be successfully laundered.
+
+
+PATTERN WEAVING
+
+Before undertaking more difficult problems in weaving it will be
+necessary to explain in general two important processes. The first
+one is the process of pattern weaving; the second, dyeing. Among the
+heirlooms treasured by many families are the beautiful blue and white
+coverlets or bedspreads and the hand-woven table-cloths and towels. No
+one with strong domestic tastes who has been fortunate enough to see
+these products of home industry can have failed to be charmed with the
+wonderfully wrought designs and with the quaint names by which they
+were once well known; for our grandmothers designated these designs by
+such names as Spring Flowers, Governor's Garden, the Path of the Roses,
+Flowers of Lebanon, Ladies' Delight, Fairies Ring, and doubtless by
+many more names which have been lost. This work in pattern design is
+wrought by the use not of two pedals and harnesses, right and left, as
+used in the first three problems, but by the use of several additional
+harnesses.
+
+_To Be Learned by Experimenting._--If the beginner in weaving has
+mastered the use of the simple loom with two harnesses it is possible
+to extend her knowledge and skill to the successful operation of a
+pattern weaving loom. But the procedure is too technical and too varied
+to be described in detail as directions for a practical problem for
+amateurs. It is far better to experiment with a loom of this kind
+under the guidance of some person competent to point out the way step
+by step. Nor will it be possible, in a brief description of this
+somewhat intricate subject, to suggest ideas for original weaving
+designs to ambitious beginners who wish to take up pattern weaving.
+Copies of the traditional designs may be obtained as material for study
+and practice. After a little it will be possible to make variations and
+so lead to the delight of originating simple and perhaps more elaborate
+new patterns.
+
+[Illustration: Hand Woven Window Draperies, Couch Cover, Slumber Robe
+and Pillow Covers. Plate X]
+
+[Illustration: A written pattern with a variety of figures woven from
+it]
+
+_How Patterns Are Written._--Complete working directions for pattern
+weaving will therefore not be attempted in this chapter; but it may be
+possible to point out a few leading facts and principles which will be
+of assistance to the experimenter who ventures to take up by herself
+this interesting application of the art of weaving. Patterns for this
+work are plainly written out from right to left on cross section
+paper, as shown in the upper part of the accompanying illustration,
+each horizontal section of which corresponds to one of the harnesses
+of the loom and the pedal attached to it. If we have a four-harness
+loom, as would be required for working the pattern and weaving the
+figures illustrated, the right-hand pedal and the harness connected
+with it, which is the one farthest from the operator, are designated
+by the number 1, and correspond to that harness number in the pattern.
+Following in order, the next three pedals and connected harnesses
+are numbered 2, 3, and 4 to correspond with the same numbers in the
+pattern. Turning now to the vertical sections of the pattern, we shall
+find that each one corresponds to a certain warp thread, so that when
+the pattern is "drawn in"--_i. e._, when the warp for weaving the
+pattern is attached to the loom--we shall find the thread of the warp
+which is to be drawn through the first loop or wire indicated by a mark
+on the section of the pattern corresponding to that warp thread and to
+the number of the harness through which it is drawn. Thus, according to
+the pattern shown in the illustration, the first thread is to be drawn
+into the 3d harness, the 2d thread into the 4th harness, and 3d thread
+into the 3d harness, and so on alternately until we reach the 8th
+thread, which is drawn into the 2d harness; the 8th, 9th, 10th, 11th,
+and 12th threads are drawn alternately into the 2d and 3d harnesses,
+and the 13th, 14th, 15th, 16th, and 17th are drawn alternately into the
+1st and 2d harnesses. This process is now continued, as will be clearly
+understood by reference to the pattern, up to and including the 42d
+thread, when one drawing in of the pattern will have been completed.
+A further study of the pattern shows that the marks on lines 3 and 4
+form a continuously alternating series; and similarly that those on
+2 and 3, 1 and 2, and 1 and 4 form also a continuously alternating
+series. But these numbers, however paired, correspond to the harnesses
+into which the warp threads, indicated by the numbers 1 to 42, are
+drawn. It thus appears that after we have drawn in as many warp threads
+as the pattern calls for once around in the order indicated in the
+pattern, we have prepared the loom for weaving one of these patterns.
+We must therefore draw in the rest of the warp threads in the same
+order as those already drawn in, thus repeating the drawing in of the
+pattern as many times as required for the width of the piece to be
+woven. The illustration shows two "repeats" of the pattern.
+
+_Operation of the Harnesses._--Having explained the method of drawing
+in the pattern, we may now study the movement of the harnesses
+necessary to guide the warp properly for the weaving of the pattern. It
+has been noted that, with the pattern under consideration, harnesses
+1 and 3 hold a continuous line of alternating warp threads, leaving
+harnesses 2 and 4 to take up all the intervening warp threads. If
+then the operator should throw down pedals 1 and 3 together, and
+alternately 2 and 4 also together, the warp threads would be crossed
+exactly as in plain weaving. Bringing out a pattern in weaving must,
+of course, require a variation of the pedal movement from that used
+in plain weaving. Now, upon reference to the illustration it will
+also be noted that in writing the pattern, or in drawing it in, no
+two threads have ever come together on the same harness. If the 1st
+thread has been drawn into the 3d harness, and the 2d thread into the
+4th harness, as shown in the pattern illustrated, the operator begins
+the weaving of the pattern by throwing down the 3d and 4th pedals
+together and throwing the shuttle which carries the pattern thread.
+This operation is what weavers call a "pick." Each pick of the pattern
+thread is represented in the diagram (page 268) by a broken black line
+running across the pattern. Thus the diagram of the first design shown
+indicates that there are 6 throws of the shuttle alternately over and
+back, or 6 picks of the pattern thread, for each corresponding section
+of this design. But between every two picks of the pattern thread there
+must be a pick of the plain weave, requiring, as has already been
+explained, the pressing down of either the 1st and 3d pair of pedals
+together when the shuttle is thrown from the right side, or of the 2d
+and 4th if thrown from the left side. It is evident, then, that there
+must be two shuttles prepared for carrying the woof threads. One of
+these is to be used for the plain weave and the other for the pattern
+weave. The shuttle used for the plain weave is usually threaded with a
+fine thread of linen, though this, of course, is subject to variation
+according to the design of the weaver. The pattern weaving shuttle
+should carry a coarser thread, which may be of silk, linen, wool, or
+mercerized cotton.
+
+_Variations in Pattern._--From the fact that a carefully written
+pattern is necessary in preparing a four-harness loom for pattern
+weaving, one would naturally infer that the pattern must be closely
+followed in the weaving process. And so it must if the pattern be woven
+as written; but, after the drawing in, it is by no means necessary to
+follow the written pattern. As the weaving progresses it is easy to
+see many variations in pattern which may be woven upon one drawing
+in--patterns so varied as to seem to hold very little relation to each
+other. In fact, one of the delights of weaving with a pattern loom is
+to devise ways of modifying simple patterns, elaborating them into
+new weaving designs, producing unique and sometimes very interesting
+original figures. We have only to remember that patterns are made by
+the order and number of the overshots--_i. e._, the throws of the
+shuttle carrying the pattern threads--and that the overshots in the
+same horizontal and vertical lines are produced by the same pair. In
+the pattern illustrated the overshots are made by 2 and 3, by 1 and
+2, by 1 and 4, or by 3 and 4, not counting 1 and 3 and 2 and 4, which
+are the pairs for plain weaves. We should also remember that the last
+end in one overshot is usually the first one in the next. Examples of
+two variations in design that may be woven from the original written
+pattern, to which we have already referred, are illustrated in the
+diagram and probably at least a dozen more variations are possible.
+
+
+PROBLEM: A BORDERED TABLE SCARF
+
+This problem will require the use of the four-harness loom. The first
+thing to do is to procure the written pattern for the border and draw
+it in. When the drawing in is completed and the weaving is begun, the
+first step in the process is to weave a few inches of the plain cloth.
+In doing this, however, we shall, of course, find that the pressing
+of the right-hand and left-hand pedals as in simple weaving will not
+accomplish the desired result; for it has already been explained that
+the pedals of a four-harness loom must be worked in certain pairs to
+produce a plain weave. It will be remembered that to do plain weaving
+with the warp drawn in as required by the pattern illustrated on page
+268, it is necessary to press pedals 1 and 3 together alternately with
+2 and 4--_i. e._, both pedals of each pair must be pressed at the same
+time to produce the same effect as that produced by the alternate
+movements of the right and left pedals in simple weaving.
+
+When a sufficient length of plain cloth has been woven, the written
+pattern for the weaving of the border design must be faithfully
+consulted and the right pairs of pedals pressed down in proper order
+for the weaving of the pattern. The second or weaving shuttle carries
+the bobbin, which is filled with the colour required in the pattern.
+Any changes of colour required by the design are easily produced by
+inserting a new bobbin filled with the desired colour.
+
+_The Design._--A great variety of design is possible in table scarfs.
+It is common to weave in a narrow beading of whatever colour may have
+been chosen, following this by a few threads of white, and this in
+turn by a narrow band of the colour of the border with some slight
+suggestion of the pattern, then more of the plain white and finally
+the full pattern of the border. The centre of the table scarf is simply
+a matter of plain weaving in white or possibly in some solid colour,
+while the other end of the scarf must be woven with the same border and
+bands as were woven at first, but in the reverse order.
+
+_Variations in Design._--One pleasing style of decoration is found
+in repeating the border several times with inch-wide spaces between.
+Another variety requires a heavy border at the ends, with narrow ones
+at short intervals throughout the length. Shadow borders, so-called,
+are also common, and may alternate with borders of colour or may
+constitute the entire decoration. Shadow borders are heavy borders
+woven in the cream or body colour of the scarf instead of being in a
+contrasting shade. In order to make them stand out well it is necessary
+to use a coarser thread than is required for the colour borders. A gray
+linen plain weave is often embellished in white with delicate effect.
+There is also a heavy linen thread which is good for scarf borders. It
+is obtainable in dainty colours, and the heavy thread seems to bring
+out the patterns in greater perfection. Darning silks in fast colours
+are also employed, but these should be woven double in order to obtain
+the best effect. They are found in the market in short lengths and in
+such attractive colours as Delft blue, reseda green, pink, and catawba.
+The last two colours, used with linen in the natural shade, make a
+happy combination.
+
+Scarfs should be woven from 20 to 24 inches wide and about 1-1/2 yards
+long, unless some special use requires that they should be of different
+length. Not only do they make pleasing table covers, but they are
+useful as tray cloths, and from them charming sewing or embroidery
+aprons may be fashioned by folding one end over, tying it with ribbons,
+and arranging pockets to hold the work. One scarf will make two aprons.
+Fancy bags are also woven on the same general lines as scarfs, but
+the width needs to be only 8 or 10 inches. These may be woven of the
+pattern throughout, or they may be striped with bands or borders.
+Lined with silk and finished with ribbons or cords, they are very much
+admired for embroidery and other fancy work.
+
+
+DYEING
+
+In the discussion of the problem of hand weaving, frequent reference
+has been made to the use of coloured materials. While it is possible to
+obtain many good colours in the market, it is much more satisfactory
+to make these colours at home by the use of the dye pot. In former
+times, when hand weaving was general, there was no other way; and,
+in fact, dyeing and weaving may well be considered now, as they were
+then, sister arts. When the wool was washed, carded into rolls, spun
+into yarn, and again doubled and twisted, it was, generally speaking,
+still necessary to treat the yarn with some permanent dye before
+weaving it into cloth. One notable exception was found in the natural
+gray homespun, which was of yarn spun from the wool of both the black
+and the white sheep carded together. The modern worker with the hand
+loom will find almost the same necessity as our grandmothers did for a
+knowledge of the art of dyeing. Seldom will she find at hand just the
+shade or colour required by the design of the piece to be woven. Much
+of the material that is worked up for the woof of rugs, for example,
+will be found to be so faded or spotted that it would poorly repay one
+for the labour of weaving it up in that condition. And even the new
+material, which it is often necessary to procure for plain weaving, for
+pattern weaving, and for use in borders, will often need a bath in the
+dye pot in order to furnish the tone of colour needed.
+
+_Some Good Points in Dyeing._--Good results in dyeing are obtained by
+using the prepared dyes of the markets, mixing together more than
+one colour often, after some experimenting, in order to produce the
+desired shade. Instead of mixing the dye one may, if she chooses, dye
+first in one colour and top off with another. A fine permanent green
+is obtained by dyeing thread or cloth a good yellow and topping with a
+blue bath. Green and blue dye used together give neither green nor blue
+but a blending of both colours, which is exceedingly pleasing. In all
+cases it is better to make the dye bath weak, leaving the article to be
+dyed in the bath a long time rather than to keep it a shorter time in
+a stronger dye. The advantage is not only greater permanency of colour
+but also greater certainty in the result; for one can watch the process
+of dyeing more easily and guard against the colours becoming too dark.
+The material which remains in the dye bath until it takes practically
+all the colour from it may generally be depended upon neither to fade
+nor crock.
+
+_Some Common Dyes._--The dull, soft colours, made generations ago
+from barks and teas with alum as a mordant, had artistic qualities
+and were generally permanent. It is well worth while to experiment in
+this direction. Straw colour may be made from the old-fashioned herb
+saffron; orange comes from madder and fustic; yellow is obtained
+from powdered dock root; rusty nails boiled in vinegar with a bit of
+copperas give a good black dye, useful also in freshening black yarns
+that have acquired a dull or faded colour. White maple bark boiled
+in water makes a fine medium brown which may be made fast by first
+treating the cloth or yarn to be dyed in it with a solution of alum. A
+permanent and fine nankeen colour may be made from a pail of lye with a
+piece of copperas half the size of an egg boiled in it. In fact, nearly
+everything which possesses colour may be considered a dye. Vegetable
+substances are generally in themselves more permanent, but most dyes
+need to be fixed or "set" by the use of some mordant. All this will
+mean much experimenting, of course, unless one is fortunate enough to
+possess an old receipt book with its quaint allusions to mordants,
+kettles of brass, and vessels of pewter. The use of the prepared dyes,
+which may be easily obtained with explicit directions, is generally
+satisfactory and of course somewhat easier; and yet the interest which
+inspires one to cultivate the art of hand weaving leads to a desire
+to master all of the arts intimately associated with this ancient and
+fascinating home industry.
+
+
+
+
+X
+
+POTTERY
+
+To watch a potter thumping his wet clay--_Rubaiyat of Omar Khayyam_
+
+
+The boy who makes his mud pie, baking it in the sun, and the Indian
+who, ages ago, coiled clay in a basket which he burned away, are but
+two widely separated links in a continuous chain; for men of all time
+have found a fascination in the wet clay that is so easily moulded
+and fashioned into all manner of things of beauty and of use. And,
+beside the joy of exercising the creative faculty, there has also
+been the spur of a common need to inspire men of different races,
+independently of each other, to develop the primitive household arts,
+like pottery and rug making, by the use of methods no less remarkable
+for their similarity than for their cleverness. The impressions
+that the primitive man received from his natural surroundings were
+easily expressed in the plastic mud, and it was probably not long
+before he discovered that fire made them permanent and practically
+indestructible. Improvement was bound to come in due time. By
+washing the grosser impurities from the clay mud through a process in
+which the heavier particles settled, leaving the silt or finer clay to
+be poured off, some artist of a very early time found a material that
+became one of his most valuable helps in adding to the furnishings of
+his tribal household. First it was simply burned clay; but in due time
+enamel or glazed work found its use in tiles for building purposes, in
+grain jars, in wine jugs, in many kinds of table ware; for the uses of
+ancient terra cotta and porcelain were numerous.
+
+[Illustration: Girls at Work on Pottery. Plate XI]
+
+The primitive arts, however, were not confined to objects of necessary
+use. We find, buried with the ruins of ancient cities, many evidences
+of the potter's craft, and among them articles for decorating the
+home, for personal adornment, and for religious use, like the rings
+and scarabs of Egypt. And in modern decorative art, as applied in the
+household, the one final touch which gives that indescribable charm,
+which it is the aim of all art to give, is perhaps to be found in a
+few--a very few--choice bits of pottery.
+
+All of this use of clay, from the rude art of prehistoric times to the
+finest product of modern skill, is based on a plain scientific fact,
+_viz._, that a small quantity of water in the clay, not removable by
+any ordinary means of drying, can be driven out by intense heat so as
+to cause a permanent change in the character of the clay. This water is
+called the water of combination. If the clay is not heated more than
+enough to dry it, a later mixing with water restores it to its former
+plastic state; but clay once burned has lost its water of combination
+and never can return to its original condition.
+
+Most beginners in clay modelling will expect, perhaps in the early
+stages of their work, to be made acquainted with the potter's wheel;
+for who has not heard of this interesting device? It is of interest
+chiefly because of its practical utility in the manufacture of pottery;
+and yet no one can forget the potter's song with which Longfellow
+begins his beautiful poem Keramos, making it a text for a sermon on the
+philosophy of life:
+
+ "Turn, turn, my wheel! Turn round and round
+ Without a pause, without a sound;
+ So spins the flying world away!
+ This clay, well mixed with marl and sand,
+ Follows the motion of my hand;
+ For some must follow, and some command,
+ Though all are made of clay!"
+
+_Potter's Wheel Unnecessary._--The potter's wheel was used in
+comparatively early times and has been intimately associated with the
+art ever since. But it requires much physical strength and considerable
+skill to use it effectively; and its use has been by no means
+universal. We find the Indians of our own time and people of other
+races, expert in building pottery by hand, using the method of coiling.
+It seems best, therefore, to advise beginners to adopt the simpler
+method and to forego the use of the potter's wheel. The comparative
+inexpensiveness of the hand method of building is another point in its
+favour. The tools required are few and simple. Inexpensive and easy
+methods are favourable to the experimental stage; and it is well for
+the amateur to have every encouragement to experiment freely both with
+methods for building and with designs for his ware, keeping in mind
+always that the beautiful is generally the simple and strong, not the
+fantastic and complicated.
+
+_The Method of Coiling._--It will be understood, therefore, that in
+general the process to be followed consists in building up the bowl or
+jar or whatever the design may be by using coils of clay of the right
+consistency, welding and shaping them together, and scraping them down,
+if necessary, until they are ready to receive the first firing. After
+this they may receive a coating of glaze and be fired again. At first
+the beginner will find his chief interest simply in experimenting with
+the building up process.
+
+
+MATERIALS AND TOOLS
+
+The materials and tools needed are as follows: Clay; oil-cloth, 18
+inches square; cotton cloth or flannelette, 18 inches square; a few
+simple modelling tools; a soft pencil; drawing paper; card-board, 6
+ply; a plaster of paris "bat," or a piece of slate.
+
+_Clays._--It will be necessary to add a word of explanation in order
+that these materials and tools may be well selected. There is a
+great variety in clays, ranging from a very coarse red clay used for
+flower pots to the finest white clay used for porcelain. The latter
+is called kaolin and is very pure. A good modelling clay may be
+obtained from dealers in school supplies or from potteries. In some
+localities, especially in the neighbourhood of brick-yards or other
+clay industries, a satisfactory clay may be easily found. But, however
+obtained, some experimenting will be necessary to test its suitability.
+The modelling clay is probably the least liable to yield disappointing
+results.
+
+The cotton cloth or flannelette is to be moistened and used to wrap
+up the clay in order to keep it from drying too rapidly during the
+intervals when it is set aside. This will not be necessary during the
+early part of the process, for then it is desirable for the clay to
+stiffen as rapidly as possible by natural means.
+
+[Illustration: Simple tools used in pottery]
+
+Of the modelling tools needed some can be whittled from hard wood.
+They are not expensive, however, and the beginner will perhaps find it
+well to obtain most of them from a dealer in artists' materials. The
+accompanying illustration shows some of these, among them a very useful
+tool (F) with brass wire loops which are in turn wound with finer
+wire. F and C are especially useful for scraping clay too soft to be
+easily managed with smooth edges. The thumb-like tool A is perhaps the
+most generally useful of those shown here.
+
+In this connection it is well to emphasize the fact that _the greatest
+of all tools is the human thumb_. Cultivate its use. Most modelling and
+building can be managed with the thumb, assisted by the fingers.
+
+_The Bat and How Made._--A plaster of paris bat will be found
+exceedingly useful. A sheet of thin, unsized paper serves well,
+however, for a surface on which to build; but the dry plaster of
+the bat absorbs the moisture of the clay at the bottom and hastens
+the stiffening process. This bat can be easily made. Take a small
+quantity of water (a half pint or more according to the size of
+the bat required), sift into this from the hand an equal amount of
+plaster of paris, and stir it in until a little dry plaster appears
+at the surface. After a little more vigorous stirring let it rest a
+few minutes and then pour it into tin pans which are 4 or 5 inches in
+diameter by 1 inch deep. The pans should be previously coated on the
+inside with a thick soap solution, made by dissolving soap in hot water
+to the consistency of a thick cream. The bats will harden in 10 or 15
+minutes and may be easily removed from the pan, ready for use.
+
+
+PROBLEM: A BOWL FOR FLOWERS
+
+This problem naturally divides itself into six important steps, as
+follows: The design or profile; building and shaping; decoration, if
+any; firing (bisque); glazing; and firing the glaze.
+
+[Illustration: Variety in dimensions]
+
+_The Design or Profile._--As in all problems of decoration the first
+step is found in design. For present purposes we may consider a bowl
+as having a diameter as great as or greater than the height. The bowl
+will be more interesting from the standpoint of variety if there is
+a difference between its height and its greatest diameter, and also
+between its diameters at the top and at the bottom. The accompanying
+drawing shows such differences.
+
+[Illustration: Suggestive profiles]
+
+Another example of the value of variety is to be found in the curve
+of the profile. A line that is simple but constantly changing in its
+degree of curvature--as, for example, an elliptical curve--is more
+pleasing than an arc of a circle, which is sometimes called the curve
+of limitation. It should be noted that a curved form, in order to be
+forceful, should have some dominant curve in combination with others
+which are subordinate. The profiles illustrated in the following
+drawings have this dominant element and are in no case composed of arcs
+of circles. These varied, interesting, yet simple lines--live lines
+as they are sometimes called--consisting in each case of only two or
+three elements, are given here merely as suggestive material. A little
+experimenting will show unsuspected possibilities in strong, forceful
+curves, and the young student is advised to make many experiments in
+the effort to discover such possibilities. An example of profiles to
+be avoided is given in Problem II, on page 309. That these are
+vase forms and not bowl contours is immaterial. _A_ is commonplace
+because the two parts of the curve are too much alike. _B_ is unrestful
+in its three curves of nearly equal size. If the suggestive profiles
+illustrated in the foregoing drawing be turned upside down it will be
+noted that very few of them seem as pleasing as before. It will be
+found also that a different ratio of height to diameter will give very
+different effects with the same profile. A bowl having top and bottom
+alike may, so far as design is concerned, be classed with the pill
+box. We don't know which is the top until we have spilled the pills.
+If attractive pieces of pottery are found with the top and bottom of
+equal diameter and with curves in themselves objectionable, it will
+invariably be found that the attractiveness consists in some beauty of
+glaze, colour, or decoration which is prominent enough to conceal the
+defects of form.
+
+_Natural Forms._--It may be well to add a word here in regard to the
+imitation of natural forms in designing the general shape of any piece
+of pottery; and that word is a very brief one. Avoid them. Nature is a
+great teacher in all branches of art; but in pottery her suggestions
+are to be used as decorative elements rather than for fundamental
+shapes. A fish with a flower in its mouth does not seem appropriate;
+but a bowl for water-lilies, while it may not take the form of a fish,
+might reasonably have a fish as an element of its decoration.
+
+_Testing Profiles._--A good way to study the effect of the profile of
+both sides of the bowl is to fold the paper on which the profile is
+drawn vertically through the centre and transfer the line reversed
+by rubbing the back of the paper, thus giving the other half of the
+drawing in exact symmetry. When the general shape of the profile has
+been tested in this way one side should be redrawn carefully; then,
+with the paper folded along the centre line, so that the pencil line
+falls outside, the whole form may be cut out; and then it may be
+unfolded. The next step is to begin to build up the design in clay.
+
+_The Building._--Roll out a coil of clay a little thicker than the
+bottom of the bowl is to be; perhaps 3/8 or 1/2 of an inch will serve,
+since the bottom is to be hollowed slightly by scraping. The roll
+should be uniform in diameter and rolled as little as possible, in
+order that it may not become too dry. Upon the piece of paper or the
+plaster bat start to coil the roll from the centre until the desired
+size is reached, then smear the rolls together, working toward the
+centre. Turn the coil over and work the other side together, truing up
+the circle and making the bottom of uniform thickness. Avoid the use
+of water in smoothing the coils together. It may seem to make the work
+easier, but it softens the clay and invites careless work.
+
+[Illustration: Manipulating the coil]
+
+With another coil begin to build up the sides, making a complete
+circle, and, having pinched off the ends where they meet, join them
+carefully. Lay two or three coils in this fashion, pressing each coil
+firmly into place as it is laid, and smooth them together as in the
+base. The process is illustrated in the drawing. If the clay is very
+soft, the work may be set aside to harden a little, while a beginning
+is made upon other pieces. It is well to have two or three pieces in
+the process of construction at the same time.
+
+_Testing the Work._--A template or gauge will be needed to test the
+work as it progresses from the first rough stages to the finish. This
+is made of card-board by cutting out an exact copy of the profile,
+leaving at the bottom sufficient width to insure rigidity when the
+template is held upright on the table or bat.
+
+[Illustration: A template]
+
+As the work goes on, if the design requires that the form should be
+"brought in" toward the top, the coil must be laid a little inside of
+the profile desired, as the smoothing tends to increase the diameter
+slightly. In all the building, allowance should be made for this
+enlargement. When the coil is high enough and of the shape desired,
+it should be allowed to stiffen until it is rigid enough to handle.
+With the various modelling tools the surface should then be scraped
+wherever it is necessary to remove the hardened clay in order to give a
+symmetrical shape to the desired profile.
+
+[Illustration: Scraping a square form]
+
+A drawing is shown to illustrate the process of scraping. The surface
+should be left smooth and even; and this may be accomplished without
+water or sponge. The flat sides of the scraping tool may be used to
+polish the clay as soon as it becomes leather hard--_i. e._, hard and
+stiff, but before it begins to whiten and dry.
+
+The lip or top of the bowl will require special attention. It will
+probably need to be thinned down and have all sharp edges removed. Then
+the bowl should be turned upside down and the bottom hollowed out to
+a depth of 1/16 to 1/8 of an inch, leaving a "foot" or rim around the
+outside of the circle to give it steadiness.
+
+_The Decoration._--After the bowl is complete as to its general form,
+the problem of its decoration, if there is to be any, must be solved.
+This may be studied during the intervals when it is necessary to set
+the bowl aside to harden. If the form and colour are good, the bowl may
+possess a charm that will not be improved by decoration. On the whole,
+less decoration, rather than more, should be the aim. The three vases
+illustrated at the top of a following page are examples of pottery
+without decoration. (See page 308.)
+
+[Illustration: Bowls. Plate XII]
+
+Generally speaking, bowls like the one we are building may be decorated
+by one of three methods: By sinking lines or channels in its surface by
+means of a sharpened, chisel-like stick (D, page 285); by modelling or
+carving the surface; or by painting the surface with coloured "slip" or
+with coloured glaze. It should be explained that "slip" is a mixture
+of clay and water of the consistency of cream; it may be coloured
+or uncoloured. A combination of two or more of these methods is, of
+course, possible. Examples of the first two methods are shown in the
+illustrations of bowls, vases, and tiles. A combination of the first
+and third methods was used in decorating the tiles of the middle row
+shown in Plate XIV opposite page 316.
+
+[Illustration: Spacing in decoration]
+
+_Classes of Decoration._--The _form_ of the decoration is simply a
+matter of space division, as illustrated by two examples shown below.
+It is evident, too, that decoration, so far as form is concerned,
+divides itself naturally into three general classes: (a) The horizontal
+band; (b) the vertical division; (c) a combination of these two. The
+last will prove to be the most common of the three. It should be noted
+that an all-over pattern, which has been left out of consideration as
+tending to monotony, would commonly be a combination of both horizontal
+and vertical methods of division. It should be noted also that the
+presence of other than vertical and horizontal lines in pottery
+decoration does not affect the main classification. Typical examples
+of these divisions are illustrated in both bowls and vases, as well
+as in the cuts A and B. It will be seen in each case that one scheme
+or the other predominates and that there are possibilities for great
+variation in treatment.
+
+Analyzing the patterns shown in all these illustrations, we find that
+the band or horizontal scheme offers a succession of large and small
+spaces, giving variety and rhythm. In many of those patterns showing
+the combination type there is a concentration or "knotting" of the line
+at regular intervals, frequently at the intersection of both horizontal
+and vertical elements. This is well illustrated by the left-hand bowl
+of the middle row shown in this plate opposite page 294. When
+the method of painted decoration is employed the concentration point is
+composed of mass instead of line. All this serves to give emphasis and
+rhythm.
+
+For subject matter in decoration natural forms may be used as shown in
+the vase at the left of the top row illustrated in Plate XIII,
+opposite page 312. Or an abstract arrangement of lines may be employed,
+as shown in its nearest neighbour, which may or may not have had its
+origin in a very much conventionalized natural motif. The essential
+thing to remember is that the divisions of spaces must be varied and
+rhythmic and the decoration suited to the method of application.
+
+_How the Design is Applied to the Clay._--After the design has been
+studied as much as possible on paper it should be planned out on the
+bowl with a soft pencil, allowing sufficient space for the incised
+line or channel to be made. The clay should be leather-hard--_i. e._,
+stiff but not dry. The spacing around the circumference should be made
+exact, deviating somewhat, if necessary, from the spacing of the paper
+drawing. A good way to manage this important step in the process is to
+measure the circumference at the point of greatest width with a narrow
+strip of paper and then to divide this circumference by folding the
+paper evenly into the number of units desired. By wrapping the paper
+around the bowl again the points of division may be transferred to the
+clay and then projected upward or downward vertically to the belt that
+it is desired to meet. It is necessary to make sure that the vertical
+lines are true "meridians" and do not swerve to the right or the left.
+In order to test the horizontal lines, measurements may be made from
+top or bottom. All of this work is best done free-hand; for, aside from
+the value of the eye training derived, hand-built pottery is seldom
+exact enough to permit of a more mechanical method of planning its
+decoration.
+
+The drawing on the clay having been completed, the next point is to
+choose the tool best fitted for the work and carefully make the cuts,
+deepening them from time to time as the work progresses. If the design
+is to be worked out in line, a chisel, like that illustrated in D (page
+285), may be whittled from a pine stick. It is held nearly
+upright and used as a scraper to cut out at first a shallow channel.
+Reserve should be exercised in cutting, because, generally speaking,
+there is danger of making the design too insistent. Some of the best
+designs are very subtle and quiet. Care should be taken, however, to
+allow for a slight filling in of the hollow by the glaze when it is
+applied.
+
+_Modelling a Decoration._--If the decoration is to be modelled it would
+seem wise to do it, in whole or in part, as the work is built up; but
+in this case great care will be needed to keep a firm hold on the
+relief and unity of the decoration. It will be easy to over-model the
+work.
+
+_How Under-glaze is Applied._--For decoration with under glaze the
+colours given under the head of glazing (page 304) are mixed
+in different proportions with dry powdered clay and water to form a
+colour paste. This is painted on the "green" or moist clay, forming
+a smooth and even surface. Experience will teach the proportions of
+colour to be mixed with the clay. These proportions vary greatly with
+different colours. A very strong colour like cobalt will give a deep
+blue if mixed in the ratio of one part by weight of cobalt to ten parts
+of clay. Colours like the oxides of iron and copper are of medium
+strength, and antimony is quite weak.
+
+Before the work is left to dry it would be well to make sure that
+all corners and rough edges are smoothed off as they will show light
+and rough through the glaze. The use of sand-paper, however, is not
+advised, though it may occasionally be used in the emergency of an
+accidental roughness remaining after the piece is dry. The aim should
+be to have all clay work show something of the plastic nature of the
+material out of which it is made.
+
+_Firing._--Pottery must be "bone" dry before it is fired. A very
+satisfactory portable kiln for firing may be purchased for from $34 to
+$175, according to the size. The smallest size, which is illustrated in
+the next drawing, will be ample for the needs of one or two persons.
+If, however, the amateur does not care to go to the expense of
+purchasing a kiln, it is generally possible to find a pottery factory
+in the vicinity that will undertake the firing and perhaps the glazing.
+
+[Illustration: A portable kiln]
+
+_Temperature Required._--Pottery is fired at a temperature varying,
+according to the clay and the glaze used, from approximately 1800
+to 2000 degrees Fahrenheit. Modelling clay fires at 1958 degrees
+Fahrenheit, or what is called "cone 04." This term comes from the fact
+that the heat is gauged by pyrometric cones, which can be seen through
+a spy hole attached to the kiln. These cones are graded compositions
+of various materials and possess different degrees of resistance to
+heat. They are usually set up in clay in groups of three or more. When
+one of them melts it bends over, as illustrated in the accompanying
+drawing, which shows cone 05--the most fusible one--completely "down,"
+and 04 at a point indicating that it is time to shut off the heat from
+the kiln. This must be done gradually and the kiln must be allowed to
+cool completely before it is opened. This is especially necessary when
+firing the glazes described in the following section, which require
+the same temperature as modelling clay. Further details about firing
+and caring for the kiln may, of course, be learned from descriptions
+accompanying the apparatus. Pottery comes out of the first firing in
+the kiln a dull porous ware and in colour either cream, buff, or red,
+according to the amount of iron in the clay. In this state it is called
+"bisque" or "biscuit."
+
+[Illustration: Pyrometric cones]
+
+_Glazing._--It is necessary to bring the pottery up to the condition of
+bisque before it can be glazed; or, to speak more accurately, before
+it can be over-glazed; for it has already been shown how the so-called
+under-glaze is put on before the first firing. The subject is somewhat
+technical, and it will not be possible in a single chapter to take up
+the details extensively. Briefly speaking, the glazes most used for
+this class of work are the lead glazes--combinations of "white lead" or
+carbonate of lead as a flux with kaolin, flint, whiting, feldspar, and
+other ingredients. These are supplied in powdered form and are ground
+together in water by means of a mill or a large mortar and pestle; a
+mortar 8 inches in diameter will serve.
+
+_Grinding the Glaze._--The grinding should continue about an hour. It
+should be said, however, that there is such a thing as grinding too
+fine. After the glaze has been properly ground a small quantity of gum
+tragacanth, dissolved in water, is to be added as a binder to prevent
+flaking and rubbing off in handling. It is also a good plan, though
+not always necessary, to strain the glaze, as soon as it is ground,
+through fine muslin. The tools and materials needed for this work may
+be itemized as follows: Lead carbonate, whiting, Canadian feldspar,
+Florida kaolin, French flint, white oxide of zinc, and various other
+oxides and colours noted in the text; earthenware bowls, 10 or 12
+inches in diameter, for holding the glaze; large spoons, preferably
+aluminum; agate mortar and pestle, 8 inches in diameter.
+
+_Example of Matt Glaze and Bright Glaze Mixes._--Two mixes are given
+below calculated to fuse at cone 04. One has a "matt" or dull velvety
+surface, and the other has a "bright" or shiny surface. The matt will
+be found more desirable for general work because it harmonizes better
+with flowers and foliage. The figures given below refer to units of
+weight. Metric weights (grams) are most convenient to use, but any
+units will serve so long as the same one is used throughout. The matt
+glaze should be of the consistency of thick cream, the bright glaze
+somewhat thinner.
+
+
+ MATT BASE
+ Lead carbonate 154
+ Whiting 25
+ Canadian feldspar 83
+ Florida kaolin 51
+
+
+ BRIGHT BASE
+ Lead carbonate 142
+ Whiting 20
+ Canadian feldspar 84
+ Florida kaolin 8
+ White oxide of zinc 8
+ French flint 44
+
+The bases itemized above are colourless and there must be added to
+them from 3 to 6 per cent. of colouring material that will stand
+heat. A list of materials with their colours when fired is given on
+page 304, together with a few typical combinations of colours in
+quantity suitable to be added to the glaze bases given above. The
+following lists are by no means complete, and it is expected that the
+young decorator will make use of these colour mixtures simply as an
+introduction to quite extensive experimenting:
+
+
+ COLOUR MATERIALS
+
+ Black oxide of cobalt Blue
+ Black oxide of copper Blue green
+ Green oxide of chromium Yellow green
+ White oxide of antimony Lemon yellow
+ Red oxide of iron Yellowish brown
+ Green oxide of nickel Dirty gray (for neutralizing)
+ White oxide of tin Makes glaze opaque
+ Black oxide of manganese Purplish brown
+ Yellow ochre Yellow
+ Burnt umber Brown
+
+
+ COLOUR COMBINATIONS
+
+ Olive green
+ Iron oxide 5
+ Cobalt oxide .5
+
+ Dark brown
+ Iron oxide 3
+ Nickel oxide 2
+ Manganese oxide 5
+
+ Light gray-blue
+ Tin oxide 5
+ Cobalt oxide .5
+ Copper oxide 1.7
+
+ Blue-green
+ Cobalt oxide 1
+ Copper oxide 7
+ Yellow ochre 4
+
+ Dark gray-blue
+ Nickel oxide 5
+ Yellow ochre 3
+ Cobalt oxide 2
+ Copper oxide 1
+
+_Applying the Glaze._--Before applying the glaze to the piece of
+pottery or bisque, the latter should be soaked in clear water for
+about five minutes or until the air is expelled from the pores. When
+this has been accomplished it should be removed from the water and all
+moisture should be wiped from its surface. The piece is then ready to
+be dipped into the glaze, or to have the glaze poured over it, if the
+size and shape of the piece make it more convenient to apply the glaze
+in this way. It is usually best to glaze the inside first, shaking out
+all the superfluous glaze before applying the glaze to the outside.
+During this process the piece must be held firmly but by as few points
+of contact as possible. These points of contact will generally need to
+be touched up before it is ready for firing.
+
+It is sometimes necessary to glaze large pieces with a brush, putting
+on several coats in order to cover the surface with an even thickness.
+The matt glaze requires a greater thickness than the bright glaze
+in order to develop its characteristic velvety texture. The greater
+thickness may be easily secured, because it flows more slowly than
+the thinner bright glaze and is less likely to drip from the sides of
+the piece to which it is being applied; but, on the other hand, it
+is at a disadvantage in that it does not, in flowing slowly, correct
+inequalities of thickness so readily as the more mobile bright glaze
+does. A certain thickness, however, is essential; and if, after firing,
+it is found that the glaze was put on too thin, a second coat may be
+applied and the article again fired.
+
+_Firing the Glaze._--Before the glazed piece is fired the glaze should
+be dried and what runs down and collects about the bottom or foot
+should be scraped off. It should then be set in the kiln on a kind of
+pointed tripod of hard burned clay, called the "stilt," which prevents
+the glaze from sticking to the floor or shelves of the kiln. All glazed
+ware should be placed in the kiln with at least 1/2 an inch of space
+between the pieces to prevent them from sticking together during the
+fusing state of the glaze, when it is apt to bubble or "boil."
+
+The firing of glaze is a process very similar to that employed in the
+production of bisque, already described. Greater care, however, must
+be taken in controlling the increase in temperature so that it shall
+be even and steady--free from all sudden flashes of heat. The cooling
+also should be very gradual and, as in bisque firing, the kiln should
+be allowed to get cool before it is opened. With this second firing the
+pottery is finished unless it should happen that a second coat of glaze
+is found to be necessary. If only a few spots need attention, this
+second coat is best applied with a brush.
+
+
+PROBLEM: A VASE FOR LONG STEMMED FLOWERS
+
+The tools required for making this vase are the same as those used
+for the bowl, and the process of building is much the same. The chief
+difference is that it is more difficult to preserve the profile in
+building because the added height and the greater weight tend to
+bulge the lower part. To meet this difficulty it will be necessary to
+set the work aside quite often in order to let the lower part harden
+sufficiently to support the upper part.
+
+_The Profile._--In preparing the profile the same rules hold as were
+applied in working up the problem of the bowl. It will be well to
+remember, however, that the curves of a vase must be treated with
+greater reserve as to their lateral projection than was necessary in
+the case of the bowl--_i. e._, the curve of a vase should be enclosed
+within a rectangle narrower in comparison with its height than is the
+case with the curve of a bowl. The reason for this, of course, is found
+in the greater height of a vase in comparison with its diameter. The
+following figure shows three typical vase forms. If these curves be
+compared with those shown on page 288, illustrating bowl contours,
+it will be observed how the height of the vase is emphasised in the
+greater restraint and subtlety of its curves. In the next illustration
+we have two "horrible" examples to which attention has already been
+called in the suggestions for the design of bowls. The dotted lines in
+the illustration show how these curves may be improved if, in either A
+or B, one element of the compound curve be made dominant at the expense
+of the other. If at the same time the diameter be made smaller in
+comparison with its height the attractiveness of the contours will be
+still more improved. Indeed, it will be a transformation from a profile
+that is positively bad to one that is very good.
+
+[Illustration: Typical vase forms]
+
+[Illustration: Profile to be avoided]
+
+_Decoration._--The problem of decoration is not very different from
+that of the bowl. Here again, however, the added height seems to call
+for greater accent by means of vertical or panel divisions. Unless this
+be understood there is some danger that the larger vertical spaces will
+seem to offer simply more room for horizontal bands, resulting in a
+barber pole effect.
+
+_Handles._--If handles or buttresses are desired, care should be taken
+that they are designed as an integral part of the vase--_i. e._, that
+they continue or reinforce its lines. Two suggestions for the treatment
+of the problem of handles are given in the accompanying drawing.
+It will be noted how sympathetically these handles conform to the
+lines of the vases to which they are attached. Handles that give the
+impression of being made for another vase should be avoided.
+
+[Illustration: Suggestions for handles]
+
+
+PROBLEM: THE FERN DISH
+
+The process of building the fern dish is not essentially different from
+that employed in making the bowl described in the first problem. If the
+fern dish is to be round, the coiling method may be used; but if the
+dish is to be square or rectangular it is not necessary to use this
+method. In place of it the process of "piecing on" may be
+employed--_i. e._, one piece of soft clay may be added to another and
+the different pieces welded together as the work proceeds.
+
+[Illustration: Development of the fern dish]
+
+_The Lining._--The fern dish requires a separate inner dish or lining
+with a hole in the bottom of it like that in the ordinary flower
+pot. This feature forms the unique part of the problem. Generally
+speaking, the presence of this lining seems to call for a little closer
+approach to the vertical in the sides of the outer bowl; and yet some
+latitude is allowable, as is shown in the right hand dish illustrated
+in Plate XIII following, which is somewhat similar in profile
+to that illustrated in the accompanying drawing. This drawing shows
+the development of the problem as applied to a round fern dish. Much
+freedom, however, may be used in the plan as either the round or the
+rectangular fern dish seems to give satisfaction. The half section
+in the drawing shows a very narrow space between the inner and outer
+bowls at the top edges. This adds greatly to the good appearance of the
+completed fern dish. The sides of the inner dish are made vertical,
+since it is necessary for it to be easily removed.
+
+_Decoration._--The problem of decoration differs very little from
+that discussed under the problem of the bowl. Either the fern itself
+or its woodland neighbours may easily furnish the motif. Sometimes
+there is occasion for designing similar dishes not for ferns but for
+other plants. Thus the smaller square dish, illustrated in Plate XIII
+opposite, was designed and made for the familiar "bluets," and
+the subject matter for its design was found in that flower.
+
+_Glazing._--The rules already given for glazing apply in this case, but
+it will be necessary to glaze the outside fern dish only. It is well,
+however, to glaze a narrow strip along the upper edge of the inner
+dish; but the rest of it should be left unglazed. It hardly needs to
+be added that in firing it is necessary to keep the inner and outer
+dishes separate.
+
+[Illustration: Vases and Fern Dishes. Plate XIII]
+
+
+PROBLEM: THE CANDLESTICK
+
+_The Design._--This problem introduces several points in design that
+need to be especially emphasized. The candlestick should be of such
+size that it will easily support the average candle without putting the
+user to great inconvenience in fitting it by paring it off or melting
+it down. It is necessary to provide a lip to catch the stray drops
+of wax that will run down the sides of the candle; and it will be a
+convenience to have this supplemented by a slight dishing of the base
+if the candlestick is to be carried about. If a handle is to be added
+it should seem to be a natural outgrowth of the candlestick itself, as
+was explained in the discussion of handles for vases; and it should,
+at the same time, offer a place for a firm and comfortable grasp. The
+accompanying drawing shows how handles may be designed really to form a
+part of the candlestick and at the same time, by means of a sharp bend
+or elbow at the top, to provide a natural place for the thumb to assist
+in grasping the handle.
+
+Whether the candlestick is to be high or low depends entirely upon
+the use intended for it or upon the preference of the user. Generally
+speaking, a low candlestick is better for carrying about and a high
+one more desirable for standing in a cabinet or on shelf or table. It
+is well for some definite idea of utility to manifest itself in the
+form chosen. Merely planning a tube and a handle upon a base, without
+carefully relating these three different elements according to the
+requirements of use, can hardly be called designing a candlestick.
+
+[Illustration: Suggestive designs for candlesticks]
+
+The building of the candlestick is started, like the bowl in the
+first problem, by coiling from the centre, and the rim may be added
+in the same way. Care should be taken, however, to attach the central
+tube firmly. This may be coiled or simply modelled from a single lump
+of clay. If there is to be a handle it is well to build it at the
+time the central tube is built, as it is then easier to make a firm
+attachment.
+
+
+PROBLEM: TILES
+
+The varied and extensive uses of tiles make it difficult to limit
+the scope of this problem. Tiles are used for paving, wall facings,
+ceilings, coverings for stoves, linings and facings for fireplaces,
+rests for flower pots and teapots, and for various other purposes.
+Tiles figure very prominently in the history of art. They are objects
+of interest and study in many public buildings and museums throughout
+the civilized world. But this problem will confine itself to two of the
+many varieties of tiles, _viz._, tiles designed for bowls or teapots
+and tiles used for the facing of fireplaces.
+
+[Illustration: A tile frame]
+
+_The Tile Frame._--In building tiles a frame is used measuring about 6
+inches square by 5/8 of an inch thick. The strips forming the frame
+may be 1 inch wide, lightly nailed together at the corners so that,
+if necessary, the frame can be easily taken apart while the clay is
+moist. This frame is placed on a plaster bat or piece of paper and
+the clay forced firmly into its corners and sides, working toward the
+centre, until the frame is completely filled. It is then turned over
+in order to make sure that the under side of the clay is thoroughly
+welded together. Care should be taken to use sufficient clay to bring
+both surfaces well up to the surface of the frame, scraping off the
+surplus clay with a straight edge. While the clay is moist, one side
+is chosen for the back, and this is hollowed out to prevent warping.
+The hollowing may take the form shown in the right-hand tile at the
+top of Plate XIV, or it may be in the shape of channels 3/4 of an inch
+or more in width, separated by ridges 1/2 of an inch wide running
+across the back of the tile. Whichever method is used, the depth should
+be about 3/16 of an inch and not over 1/4 of an inch. Even when the
+utmost precaution is taken, the tile is very liable to warp. It should
+therefore be dried slowly and with the greatest possible evenness of
+exposure on both sides. The greatest help of all is found in the use of
+the so-called "grog." This is made by grinding to a powder clay that
+has been fired once and shrunk, but not glazed. It is used by mixing it
+with the clay before it is moulded, in the proportion of one part grog
+to three of the clay. It may be added here that grog will be found of
+great assistance not only in making tiles but in making other ware. It
+will not be necessary, however, to burn clay for the express purpose of
+making grog. The occasional failures which develop at the first firing
+of every batch of pottery will furnish an adequate supply.
+
+[Illustration: Tiles. Plate XIV]
+
+_Decoration._--When the tile is dried and shrunk a little it may be
+easily taken from the frame, but it should be allowed to get quite
+stiff before decoration is applied. While the hardening process is
+going on the decoration may be studied. The three general methods
+of decoration considered under the flower bowl--_viz._, the sunken
+line, the modelled surface, and the painting with under-glaze or
+over-glaze--are all available for use with the tile. If it is to be
+a tea tile the modelled surface must be treated with considerable
+caution, otherwise there may result an uneven surface for the teapot to
+rest upon.
+
+_Firing._--In giving the tile its first firing it is safer to stand
+it on one edge in the kiln, but not on the floor of the kiln, as the
+intense heat of the floor would be liable to shrink that side more
+than the others. It may be supported on two stilts or it may be placed
+on one of the shelves. For the glaze firing the tile should be placed
+flat on the stilt.
+
+_Tea Tiles._--The tiles illustrated at the top and bottom of Plate
+XIV were designed and made to serve as rests for a teapot, a bowl,
+or a vase. It will be noticed that the centre is left free with one
+exception, which is given as an interesting variation from the general
+rule. The free space is an advantage in giving relief to the design
+and in furnishing an even surface for the teapot or bowl to rest upon.
+In the decoration of rectangular tile forms the general principles as
+to variety of measure or shape in space divisions hold true. Emphasis
+should be concentrated at the corners in order to strengthen the design.
+
+_Fireplace Tiles._--Some of the tiles illustrated in Plate XIV would
+be entirely appropriate for facing a border around the opening of a
+fireplace. This is especially true of the middle design shown at the
+top of the plate, on account of the lines which project through the
+corner design nearly to the edges of the tile. This makes it especially
+adapted to repetition in a facing or border.
+
+[Illustration: Pottery, Designed and Made by Schoolgirls. Plate XV]
+
+_Decoration of Tiles._--It is in the field of painted
+decoration, however, that the most attractive possibilities in
+fireplace tile designs are found. The framed tile illustrated in Plate
+XV opposite--an example of over-glaze painting--is intended for
+use as a colour accent for the wall. This tile is painted in matt glaze
+between raised outlines. Three similar tiles are illustrated in the
+middle row in Plate XIV. The right-hand one, like the framed
+tile of Plate XV, is a matt over-glaze, but the outline instead
+of being raised was slightly depressed. The other two are examples of
+under-glaze painting. They were painted on moist clay, as described in
+the problem of the bowl, and afterwards covered with a bright glaze.
+In this case the glaze was itself coloured, thus adding richness to
+the colour scheme. The repetition in a tile facing of landscapes,
+designed to be complete or nearly so, would be tiresome. It is better
+so to design the entire facing that it will be made up of a series of
+very simple landscape motifs, each fairly complete in itself, but all
+so related to each other as to form, when joined, a larger, somewhat
+conventionalized, landscape. A treatment of this kind lends itself to
+many other decorative schemes.
+
+The fireplace offers a great opportunity for design, not only in
+itself, but as related to the decorative scheme of the room in which
+it is placed. It should not be forgotten that it is, in a sense, the
+focal centre of the room. This fact, together with its comparatively
+small size, makes it possible to give it a strong and rich note of
+colour, accenting the prevailing colour scheme of the room. Tiles,
+properly designed and applied, offer a rich and varied field for
+charming effects in colour and texture.
+
+
+
+
+XI
+
+DECORATIVE WORK IN LEATHER, COPPER, AND OTHER MATERIALS
+
+ To become an artist in dealing with tools and materials is not
+ a matter of choice or privilege; it is a moral necessity; for
+ a man's heart must be in his skill and a man's soul in his
+ craftsmanship--_Hamilton Wright Mabie_
+
+
+LEATHER WORK
+
+Leather work, like weaving and pottery, is of very ancient origin.
+The New Testament text concerning "new wine in old bottles" referred
+to bottles of leather, or wine skins. We read of leather as having
+been used in still earlier times for shields, saddles, harnesses,
+parts of chariots, and as an accessory to clothing. In the middle ages
+the "gentle craft of leather" was not confined to the shoemakers'
+useful productions but included much ornamental work. There were wall
+coverings of leather with designs carved, or modelled, or stamped with
+hot tools; seats were upholstered and books were covered with tooled
+leather. Some of this work was richly adorned with painted and gilt
+figures like the celebrated Spanish leather.
+
+_Why Leather is Suited to Decoration._--Leather seems, therefore,
+to have won the right to a high place among the materials suited to
+decoration. Its beautiful texture, the rich brown tones of its natural
+colour, the ease with which it takes dyes, and the readiness with
+which under proper treatment, it receives and retains the marks of the
+modelling tool, qualify it to minister to the artistic sense no less
+than its durability enables it to serve the more common uses.
+
+_Limited Decoration Desirable._--The tooling of leather is based upon
+the fact that, when wet, the fibre yields readily to compression and
+receives impressions that are retained after the leather is dry. But
+the beauty of design depends upon the colour and texture of the surface
+quite as much as upon the figured impressions upon it. It is therefore
+a good point in design not to cover the surface so completely that the
+peculiar beauty of the material itself be lost. The decorations should
+be bold and rich, but the tooling should be confined to a small part of
+the surface. Calf skin and cowhide are well suited to tooling. They are
+supplied in two general forms, _viz._, the smooth, generally as Russia
+calf, and the rough or split cowhides, known as ooze. Leather may be
+stained a variety of colours by aniline dyes; but since the natural
+colour of leather is brown, brownish tones are more satisfactory than
+the blues, greens, violets, grays, etc., because they seem more sincere.
+
+[Illustration: Leather-working tools]
+
+_Tools._--The simple tools required for tooling leather may be
+purchased at small cost, or they may be made from cheap nut picks
+by filing these to shape, polishing them, and buffing them. The
+illustrations show two different tools, each double pointed. A and
+B are different views of the first tool; C is the second tool. The
+narrow pointed end of the first tool is for outlining and working into
+corners. The broad, flat end is for smoothing down and for general use;
+the broad tool should be used whenever possible. The round point on
+the left end of C is used for outlining and transfering the design to
+leather. The right hand end of C is known as the background tool. It is
+cupped out like a nail set, as indicated by the lengthwise section just
+above and by the end view at the extreme right; in fact, a nail set may
+be used for the same purpose. The background tool, however, is to be
+used sparingly. If used to excess, especially on large surfaces, the
+result is likely to have a mechanical and "shoppy" appearance.
+
+
+PROBLEMS
+
+TO DESIGN AND TOOL A BELT
+
+The sizes given in the illustration on page 325 are typical, but it is
+expected that in this and other problems, dimensions will be varied to
+suit conditions. When the size has been determined the leather should
+be cut a little longer and wider than the final dimensions are to be,
+to allow for attaching the belt pin or buckle. The strip of leather
+should be thoroughly soaked in _cold water_ and then rolled in dry
+cloth until the leather is dry enough for tooling. It is essential
+that there should be absolute uniformity of moisture. If on applying
+the tool, water follows pressure, the leather is still too wet. If it
+should get too dry to retain the mark of the tool it may be sponged on
+the back. There is danger of water stains, however, if the entire back
+is not wet.
+
+[Illustration: Two belt designs]
+
+_The Design._--The illustration shows two treatments. An interlaced
+pattern is shown in A which concentrates the interest at the ends and
+in the middle of the back. The pattern shown is tooled solid and the
+background is left untooled. If the pattern be tooled in outline it is
+well to shade these outlines out into the background in order to give
+relief to the interlaced bands.
+
+Modelled natural forms are shown in B. In this the background is tooled
+down, but is heaviest at the ends or in the spaces against the raised
+forms. This gives the background a richer appearance than it has when
+tooled absolutely flat. Both patterns here shown are straight with
+parallel sides. Other shapes are possible--for example, those wider in
+the middle and tapering toward the ends.
+
+When a satisfactory design has been worked out and drawn it is
+transferred to thin bond paper. The greatest care should be taken not
+to have any pencil marks on the back of this paper, for they leave a
+dirty gray stain on the leather which is difficult to remove. It may
+be added here that whenever it is desired to mark the leather for any
+purpose a tool should be used, not a pencil.
+
+_The Process._--As soon as the leather has dried just enough to retain
+the marks, the pattern should be placed upon it, pencilled side up,
+allowance being made for trimming to the desired width. The paper may
+be held in position by thumb tacks, which must not, however, pass
+through the leather inside the part that is to be cut off. The pattern
+may now be traced through the paper, over the lines of the drawing,
+with the round pointed tool. Care will have to be exercised to make
+sure that the pattern is completely transferred to the leather. When
+this is accomplished the pattern should be removed and the lines,
+which will be found somewhat dimly traced on the leather, should be
+immediately deepened by going over them with the same tool.
+
+[Illustration: Method of using the broad tool]
+
+The next step is to tool down the design; and in doing this the work
+should be turned under the tool rather than the tool itself on the
+work, in order that the pressure of the tool may be applied at the edge
+of the pattern farthest from the hand. This not only insures a correct
+and convenient position of the tool, but allows a perfect view of the
+work. In this part of the process the broad tool should be used, moved
+sidewise, as shown by the direction of the arrow in the accompanying
+cut. In working up into corners the narrow tool may be used if
+necessary. The movement may be described as "ironing the leather down."
+The surface should not be roughed up or cut up into "shoulders." It
+is a process requiring time. One should not try to get the full depth
+with the first pressure of the tool. One should coax the surface and
+add pressure with each succeeding stroke, taking care that the tool
+does not scrape. It should glide; and yet, on the other hand, beginners
+will perhaps need to be cautioned not to wear out the surface by feeble
+scratching and patting. A firm, even gliding pressure does the work.
+As the leather dries it will be seen that the tooling has given it a
+dark, glossy surface. When the process is completed the belt may be
+trimmed down with a firm, sure cut of the knife, using a straight edge
+wherever straight lines are desired.
+
+
+TO DESIGN AND TOOL A MAT
+
+[Illustration: Supported and unsupported circles]
+
+_The Design and the Process._--The purpose for which a mat is used
+requires as one condition of design that there should be a plain
+surface in the middle. If the general form be square the design at the
+corners should be strengthened. If circular, the design should be so
+arranged that it will lend support to the perfect curves of the circle
+rather than weaken them. In the three outlines given below, C shows
+a form supporting the circle; D and E show forms tending to weaken
+the circle. Conditions determining size are more variable in this
+problem than in others, because of the great variety of uses which a
+mat may serve. In a design like that shown in A of the accompanying
+illustration, the portions left untooled--_i. e._, the leaves and
+fruit--may be raised still more by pressing out the leather from the
+back by means of a tool. To do this the leather should be placed face
+down in the palm of the hand or on modelling wax, which has been
+covered with a piece of chamois or sheepskin. Then by gently forcing
+the leather down with a round, blunt tool such as the blunt end of a
+nut pick the desired relief in the figure may be obtained. After this
+is done it will probably be necessary to turn the mat over and correct
+the modelling. In order to preserve the higher relief it is well to
+back it up with cotton batting, soaked in paste, and finally to cover
+the entire back with a lining of silk or leather.
+
+[Illustration: Two mat designs]
+
+
+TO DESIGN AND TOOL A PEN WIPER
+
+A pen wiper consists of a cover, which in this case must be made of
+leather suitable for tooling, and several leaves of soft material like
+sheepskin or chamois, which should match the cover in colour. The
+process of tooling the pen wiper does not differ essentially from that
+already employed in the foregoing problems. It should, of course, be
+carried through to completion before the book is made up. These parts
+are to be tied together with knots of sheepskin thongs of the same
+colour.
+
+[Illustration: Steps in tying a knot]
+
+The series of cuts given below show the progressive steps in forming
+the knot, which should finally take the shape of Figure 5. After it has
+been formed the thongs are passed through holes punched in the cover
+and leaves of the pen wiper, and secured by a second knot formed on the
+back, resembling Figure 4 with the ends cut as close as will leave
+them securely tied.
+
+[Illustration: Two designs for pen wipers]
+
+Another illustration gives two suggestions for the design: A, a
+rectangular pen wiper tied with two knots at the end; B, a circular pen
+wiper tied with one knot in the middle. In these designs, and indeed
+in all others, decoration should recognize (not antagonize!) the outer
+form of the article to which it is applied. This point is made in the
+illustration.
+
+
+TO MAKE A SLIP COVER FOR A NOTE-BOOK FILLER
+
+[Illustration: Design for slip cover]
+
+_Planning the Cover._--The object in this problem is to make a
+permanent protection for fillers. It is well known that the fillers
+themselves may be purchased for a trifling sum and that they are
+provided with a backing of stiff paper which is designed to be slipped
+into a pocket in the back of a leather cover and thus form a neat
+pocket note-book. It is evident that the dimensions of the filler
+determine the size of the cover; but, in planning the cover, care
+should be exercised to allow sufficient play for width, length, and
+thickness after all the cutting and sewing are done. This means that
+the stock for the cover and lining should be cut a little larger than
+called for in the final size. The design illustrated shows both the
+outside (A) and the inside (B) of the cover. As it is planned the cover
+is to be lined with sheepskin of harmonizing colour; but this may be
+left out if desired, though it, of course, gives a much better finish
+to put it in.
+
+_Assembling the Parts._--The first step after cutting out the leather
+for the cover is to prepare the leather and tool it, if it is to have
+any decoration. A piece of leather should be cut for the pocket, and
+the edge (C) shaped. The edges of the lining and the pocket should
+next be lightly pasted and pressed on the cover. A line is then to be
+ruled with a leather tool (not with pencil) on the outside to serve as
+a guide for stitching. A machine stitch may be employed or it may be
+done by hand. If by the latter method it will be necessary to pierce
+the leather at equal distances along the tooled line. Hand stitches may
+safely be a little longer than the machine stitches.
+
+[Illustration: Stitching with two needles]
+
+_Stitching._--A good way to secure equally spaced stitches by hand
+sewing is to make use of bow springs or spacing dividers set to the
+required distance. A more rapid way to accomplish the same thing is
+possible by making use of a tracing wheel, if one is available of
+suitable size and of the right spacing between the teeth. The hand
+stitching may be done either with one needle or with two. If with
+one it is best to sew a running stitch once around the seam and then
+return, covering the alternate spaces left on the first round. It is
+better, however, to use two needles, one on each end of one thread,
+selected long enough to finish the sewing without piecing it, and to
+proceed as illustrated in A and B, _i. e._, to draw one needle with its
+thread through to the middle of the thread, as shown in A, and then
+the other through the next hole, and so on alternately from opposite
+directions, producing a stitch like that illustrated in B. It will,
+of course, be understood that, in the illustration, the length of the
+stitch is exaggerated in order to show the process plainly.
+
+_Trimming and Finishing._--When the sewing is finished the thread is
+fastened by doubling over one or two of the stitches and drawing the
+ends inside between the cover and lining. Then a line should be tooled
+on the cover about 1/16 of an inch outside of the stitching, and on
+this line the cover, lining and pocket are trimmed together. The raw
+edges may be treated with water colour to give them a finish. Finally
+the cover is moistened a little and folded back with firm pressure in
+order to establish an even and permanent bend in the leather.
+
+
+TO DESIGN AND MAKE A DESK PAD
+
+_The Design._--The problem of design in this case is, first of all,
+to determine the dimensions of the pad, which depend, of course, upon
+the use to be made of it. Then a dimensioned sketch should be drawn in
+outline, including the spacing for the corners as illustrated in the
+drawing (A). The only detail that will need elaboration is the corner.
+The shape and decoration of one of the corners should be carefully
+laid out on thin paper, from which in due time it may be transferred to
+the leather and tooled as in other problems.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of the leather corner]
+
+[Illustration: Outline of desk pad]
+
+_Material and the Process._--For making the pad it will be necessary
+to secure a piece of binders' board--_i. e._, heavy pulp or straw
+board--of the required size. The medium weight is the best, and it may
+generally be obtained at the bookbinder's. If this cannot be obtained,
+two sheets of 10-ply card-board may be used instead. The size given in
+the drawing will carry a half sheet of commercial blotting paper. The
+edges of the paper board should be bound with passe-partout binding
+of a colour to harmonize with the leather that is to be used; the
+strips of binding should be long enough to extend under the leather
+corners but they need not reach up to the corners of the board. After
+the binding has been put on, the top of the board should be covered
+with paper also harmonizing in colour with the leather, and the paper
+should be cut of such size as to lap over the edge of the binding and
+yet leave a suitable width of the binding. The so-called "cover papers"
+will be found satisfactory.
+
+_Making the Corners._--The next step in the process is to lay out and
+cut the leather corners according to the original design. The form in
+which the leather is to be cut and the dimensions are shown in the
+illustration B. The little flap at _x_ should be noted. It is designed
+to tuck under and close the corner. The edges of leather at _x_ should
+be "skived" or thinned down so as to add to the neat appearance of the
+work. Further improvement will result from skiving down the edges S R
+S and T V T of the large flaps, which are to be folded over underneath
+and pasted down to the back of the board. The ordinary photographers'
+paste is satisfactory for this work. When the leather corners are
+placed in position for pasting, two or three thicknesses of blotting
+paper should be used at each corner, in order to secure the necessary
+space for the reception of the blotters when the board is in use. After
+the corners are pasted on, the back of the board should be covered with
+paper in the same way as the front, care being taken to leave a portion
+of the binding and leather exposed. Finally a number of blotters of
+full size should be inserted in position under the corners to keep them
+in shape and the whole placed under light pressure until dry.
+
+
+TO DESIGN AND MAKE A CARD-CASE
+
+_The Design._--In the illustration (A), showing a card-case unfolded,
+the dimensions give the finished size. The same card-case is
+illustrated in B somewhat reduced in scale and with the flaps turned
+in. The design on A is a rectangle broken at the corners. In this case,
+as it may be with all similar forms, the design is treated as a sort
+of binding, extending across the middle fold. C shows an alternative
+design which is treated as a panel and may be placed on one or on both
+sides of the card-case. The question of which is the top and bottom in
+such a design as that in C can be determined only by the owner's habit
+of holding a case. Sometimes a monogram is placed in one of the inner
+flaps, as illustrated in A, or on one of the outer surfaces.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a card-case]
+
+_The Process._--In cutting the leather for a card-case it is necessary
+to provide a piece a little larger than the finished dimensions in
+order to allow for trimming. The design should be transferred, the
+line of stitching determined, and the tooling done, according to the
+description already given for the other problems.
+
+_The Lining._--A card-case may be lined either with silk or with
+sheepskin, in a colour to harmonize with the outside. If lined with
+silk it must be trimmed down to size accurately after tooling, great
+care being exercised to have the sides parallel and the corners true
+and square. Then the silk is to be turned in at the edges and lightly
+pasted along the edges to a width of 1/8 of an inch, care being taken,
+however, not to paste those portions of the edges that will be visible
+when the flaps of the cover are turned in, _i. e._, the middle of the
+fold B. This precaution should be taken because the paste may strike
+through and spot the lining. The flaps should then be moistened a
+little and folded down with firm pressure; but before stitching they
+should be fastened down with a little paste to form pockets. This takes
+the place of basting and is followed by stitching as described in
+the problem of the note-book. If lined with sheepskin, the ooze side
+showing, the cover need not be trimmed down until after the stitching;
+then both may be trimmed at once.
+
+
+TO MAKE A LEATHER PURSE
+
+_The Design._--The details of design and construction are shown in
+the accompanying illustrations. In A the outer flap is shown tooled.
+It will be noticed that the cap of the snap fastener is taken as the
+central point in design. The tooling is done as directed in the other
+examples of this class of work.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a purse]
+
+The purse is lined throughout with leather. It has bellows ends, as
+shown in the perspective at C and in the end view at B. The pattern of
+the bellows end shown in D is intended to fold in the middle, bringing
+both ends of the leather together and thus giving an end of double
+thickness. With thin leather, such as is used in the present instance,
+this pattern is practicable. If thicker leather be used the bellows
+must be made of single thickness. In this case the pattern would simply
+be like that shown in the lower half of D.
+
+_The Process._--After the lining is pasted to the cover a snap
+fastener should be attached. Proper care, of course, should be taken
+to see that the fastener comes in the right place so that the purse
+will fold properly. The cover and lining should then be trimmed and the
+leather surface ruled for stitching. It is well to fold the inner flap
+of the purse while it is moist from pasting. Finally a little paste
+is applied along the edges of the bellows ends and they are placed in
+position.
+
+Stitching is started at the point E shown in the perspective. Hand
+stitching is the most practicable. The direction is down one side,
+up the other, and around the outside flap to the other bellows end,
+stopping at the point F. When the stitching is completed the inside
+flap should be folded down.
+
+
+TO MAKE A LIMP LEATHER BOOK COVER
+
+_The Design._--The first step is to choose the book to be bound. For
+the sake of simplicity, as perhaps the first piece of bookbinding
+undertaken, it should be a folio or "section." And it should be _worth
+binding in leather_. The subject, the paper, and the typography should
+be worthy of the distinction.
+
+[Illustration: Typical arrangements suitable for tooled leather covers
+of books. Details of tooling, relief, etc., worked out as in other
+problems.]
+
+_The Process._--If the book selected is already bound or "cased" it
+is necessary first to remove the binding or casing. Then at least
+three fly leaves should be added, made up to match the other leaves of
+the folio. A piece of bookbinders' linen or buckram is now cut to the
+size of the open folio, placed upon it like a cover, and, with the fly
+leaves and the folio itself, stitched through the back with silk of a
+colour to harmonize with the leather.
+
+The next step is to prepare the leather cover. To do this, first place
+the leather in position on the closed folio and, allowing 1/4 of an
+inch at the top and bottom and 3/8 of an inch at the fore edge, mark
+and cut out the stock for the cover. The decoration, if there is to be
+any, may now be tooled on. If the design is heavy enough in relief to
+need a backing, it may be at once filled with cotton batting, pasted in
+as directed in the problem of the mat, and covered with thin paper.
+
+Stock for the end papers is now selected. They may be of cover paper,
+or of silk, and they should harmonize in colour with the leather. They
+are formed of two thicknesses of the material chosen, by folding it
+over to fit into the part between the linen and the first fly leaf. If
+of paper they are to be cut to the length of the folio leaves, but the
+width is to be left with an allowance for adjustment after the linen
+is pasted in. If the end leaves are to be of silk, an allowance of 1/4
+of an inch must be left for turning in at the top, the bottom and the
+fore edge.
+
+We are now ready to paste the linen to the leather. Strong paste,
+with perhaps a little thin glue added, is needed for this part of the
+process. Now paste the outside end leaves to the linen on the inside of
+the cover; and, if silk has been used for these leaves, paste the other
+two to the outer fly leaves. Finally, the book should be placed under
+very gentle pressure and kept in this condition until dry. Care should
+be exercised to adjust this pressure to the character of the tooling,
+if there is any, so as not to crush it.
+
+
+COPPER WORK
+
+There is a limited field for metal work in home decoration; but
+there are some things of metal that combine beauty and utility to
+a remarkable degree and, in their making, introduce us to most
+interesting operations. Beginning with the gate, which may be of
+wrought iron, or with the door knocker, which may be of antique brass,
+we may find in every home problems of design involving work in metals.
+Ornamental hinges, key escutcheons, fastenings of various kinds,
+andirons, and other accessories of the hearth, lamp holders, card
+trays, crumb trays, bon bon dishes, and many other useful things that
+may be made in attractive forms readily suggest themselves. How some of
+these may be made is suggested in the following simple problems:
+
+
+TO MAKE A LETTER RACK
+
+This is an easy problem. Only four constructive operations are
+required, _viz._, cutting out the stock, sawing the design, bending,
+and finishing. The illustration shows the form and the dimensions and
+suggests a simple design. The material required is 18-gauge soft copper.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a letter rack]
+
+The first step in the process is to cut out a strip of copper 8 inches
+long and 4 inches wide. If necessary the edges may be trimmed even and
+then the round corners should be cut. The design is traced on strong,
+thin paper and securely pasted on the copper in the proper position
+by using cold liquid glue. A hole is drilled through each unit of the
+design by means of a hand drill, a jewellers' saw inserted, and the
+design cut. Time and patience will be required for this operation. Saws
+are easily broken, and new ones must be attached to the saw frame and
+again applied to the work. After sawing the design it is necessary to
+give the edges a smooth finish. This is done with a file. The surface
+which is to form the inside of the rack is then thoroughly cleaned and
+polished with water and pumice.
+
+The copper is now ready to be bent to the required shape. To do this
+prepare a block of hard wood 8 inches long and 2 inches wide, grip it
+in a bench vise, and clamp the strip of copper squarely across the
+block in such a position that the sides may be bent over the edges of
+the block. When this has been done it only remains to clean the outside
+surface and finish it on the felt buffing wheel. If a fine polish is
+desired, the buffing should be preceded by careful grinding with a
+Scotch water stone and water.
+
+
+TO MAKE A LETTER OPENER
+
+This requires the same kind of material as the letter rack and the same
+operations, with the addition of riveting. After the stock is cut out,
+trimmed and trued up at the edges, an outline of the design is pasted
+on, as in the previous problem, and the design cut out. The top is
+then bent over and riveted with a copper tack, having shaped the head
+of the tack in the vise before inserting it. While the tack is being
+riveted the finished head should be protected by placing it on a lead
+block. Finally the edge should be filed to the shape shown in the cross
+section, and the whole cleaned and polished.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a letter opener]
+
+
+TO MAKE A HAT PIN
+
+For this problem 12-gauge copper will be needed. The operations
+required are cutting out, sawing, and soft soldering. After the
+necessary stock has been cut to the required shape and the edges filed,
+the design is outlined, pasted on, sawed, and finished as before. It is
+desirable to grind with the Scotch stone and water to a good polish.
+The head will then be ready to be attached to the pin.
+
+[Illustration: The hat pin]
+
+Carefully scrape with a knife the portions of the surface where the pin
+is to be attached (shown in the drawing), select a steel pin of desired
+length, scrape the surface of the little disk attached to one end of
+it, apply to this disk a little soldering paste by means of a small
+stick, and then, with a gas (or alcohol) blowpipe, melt on a bit of
+soft solder, which should cover the whole disk. Now place the copper,
+outside face down, on an asbestos pad, applying the soldering paste
+to the central portion, place the disk with its bit of solder on this
+portion of the copper, and fuse as before.
+
+When the copper has cooled, clean off the oxide, which will have
+formed, by dipping in diluted sulphuric acid, and polish on the buffing
+wheel.
+
+
+TO MAKE A BELT PIN
+
+[Illustration: The belt pin]
+
+Eighteen-gauge copper is required for this problem. The operations are
+like those for the hat pin except that hard soldering is necessary. The
+slight bending of the copper, required in this case, is done by means
+of a horn mallet and a sand pad. For hard soldering, the surface must
+be scraped as before and covered with a little borax ground in water
+and applied with a small brush. The belt plate should then be placed
+on the asbestos pad, with its convex face down, and blocked up so that
+the end where the soldering is to be done is horizontal. The catch
+should then be placed in position with a small piece of silver solder
+at the base. The solder should be melted as before by means of a mouth
+blowpipe and gas or alcohol flame. The hinge is soldered on in the same
+way, and finally the pin is cleaned and polished for use.
+
+
+TO MAKE A SET OF BOOK ENDS
+
+This problem is much like the first one described under metal work.
+Sixteen-gauge copper is required. It may be bent by placing it between
+two hard wood blocks in a vise and hammering it with a rawhide mallet.
+
+[Illustration: Design for book ends]
+
+
+TO MAKE A TEAPOT STAND
+
+[Illustration: Design for a teapot stand]
+
+Twenty-gauge copper is required for this problem. The operations are
+similar to those already described; but the cutting and bending are
+much more difficult. After determining the design it will be necessary
+to make a drawing showing fully developed surfaces, as illustrated
+in the detail of the corner. The four corners must be marked and cut
+exactly as shown in the drawing. A piece of hard wood is then cut to
+the size of the top, 5 inches square in this case, to be used as a form
+on which to bend down the sides and turn the flanges. If the corners
+are correctly cut the parts will fall naturally into place, to be bored
+and riveted, as the drawing plainly shows. In order to protect the
+tablecloth, the under side of the rivet holes should be countersunk so
+that the ends of the rivets may be finished smooth and flush with the
+under surface. As an additional protection, a felt mat may be glued on
+the bottom.
+
+[Illustration: Detail of a corner]
+
+
+TO MAKE A WATCH FOB
+
+This problem introduces engraving and enamelling, two interesting but
+somewhat difficult operations. The process to be carried out is as
+follows: Using 12-gauge copper, saw the outline, and apply the design
+for the part to be enamelled to the copper by sketching it with a
+pencil or transferring it by means of carbon paper. Then strengthen the
+pencil or carbon lines by scratching lightly with a scratch awl. Imbed
+this fob in pitch, either in a pitch bowl or in a small quantity of
+pitch placed on a piece of board clamped to the bench or table. Using
+an engraving tool, remove the copper from the spot to be enamelled to
+the depth of 1/32 of an inch. It is well to have the bottom of the spot
+reasonably level but not necessarily smooth and the sides slightly
+undercut. Before applying the flux, clean, by pouring a small quantity
+of concentrated nitric acid over the cut and immediately rinsing it off
+under the water tap. Flux should be kept in a closed jar under water
+after grinding, and taken out as needed on the tip of a small strip of
+copper previously cleaned with acid. Enough flux should be applied to
+cover the bottom of the spot to be enamelled; but the depth of the spot
+must not be filled up.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a watch fob]
+
+Now place the fob on a piece of wire gauze on an iron tripod, and apply
+the flame of the blowpipe to the under side. Heat very slowly until all
+the water is driven off, then force the heat until the flux is fused.
+Allow it to cool slowly, then remove any flux that may have adhered to
+the surface of the fob by grinding with Scotch stone. Clean with acid
+as before, fill the spot with enamel in the same manner as the flux was
+applied, and fuse again. After fusing, the surface should be stoned
+again to remove inequalities and again fused, cleaned with water and
+buffed on the wheel.
+
+If it is desired to apply enamel to sterling silver the flux may be
+omitted and the enamel applied directly, but the silver should be
+cleaned with sulphuric acid instead of nitric acid, and great care
+should be used in heating as the fusing point of silver is but little
+above that of enamel. The depth of the engraving on the silver need not
+be as great as on the copper.
+
+
+TO MAKE A CARD TRAY
+
+Eighteen-gauge copper should be used for this problem, and two new
+operations, _viz._, raising and chasing, are introduced. After cutting
+out a circular piece of copper to the diameter indicated, allowing one
+half an inch extra for raising, it is annealed by heating it to red
+heat under the blowpipe flame and cooling by dipping in a sulphuric
+acid pickle bath. A circle indicating the inner edge of the rim is
+lightly scratched, and a hard wood block is cut on the end grain to the
+shape indicated in the sketch, and placed in a vise. Now holding the
+copper on the block, it is raised to shape with the round end of the
+roughing hammer. It is well to anneal frequently.
+
+[Illustration: Design for a card tray]
+
+After shaping, the design may be applied by means of transfer paper
+and the lines lightly scratched on the surface. Then imbed the tray
+in pitch and outline the design by following the lines with a narrow
+chasing tool. Reverse the tray on the pitch and, with a chasing tool
+of suitable shape, raise the body of the design to the height desired.
+Reverse on the pitch again and with a flat tool true the outlines and
+smooth the background. Remove from the pitch, trim the edge of the tray
+if it is forced out of line, clean with pumice stone and buff.
+
+[Illustration: Method of shaping with the hammer]
+
+All the foregoing articles may be agreeably coloured by painting them
+with, or immersing them in, a weak solution (boiling) of liver of
+sulphur. If soft solder has not been used, another pleasing finish
+may be secured by applying a thin coat of lubricating oil and heating
+gently until the oil is volatilized. An antique green or verdigris
+finish may be obtained by painting with a mixture of acetic acid and
+copper carbonate. Several coats may be necessary; and it is desirable
+to lacquer the surface to ensure permanency.
+
+
+WORK IN OTHER MATERIALS
+
+
+A CANDLE SHADE
+
+The materials and tools for this problem are six ply card-board in dull
+shades of gray, brown or green, and with mat surface; Japanese paper
+of average thickness; passe-partout binding a little darker than the
+card-board and of harmonizing colour; paste; a penknife with a thin
+blade; and a water colour outfit.
+
+Of the drawings included in the group on the opposite page one shows a
+development of the surface of the candle shade which is the subject of
+this problem. Referring to the elevation it will be seen that if the
+edges AE and DH be continued until they meet at O, OE and OH are really
+equal to the radii of the outer arc of the development shown in the
+upper part of the group, and OA and OD, to the radii of the inner arc.
+This upper developed surface really forms the pattern of the candle
+shade.
+
+[Illustration: Details of candle shade]
+
+The decoration consists of openings cut through the card-board
+segments. These are covered with Japanese paper, thus allowing light to
+pass through, but adding the effect of colour. A margin of 3/8 of an
+inch is allowed along the openings, the remaining spaces being divided
+by partitions of card-board, as shown in the different typical designs
+at the right of the illustration. It will be noticed that the group of
+openings forming the decoration of one side conforms in the main to the
+shape of that side. It will also be noticed that there is a variety of
+size and shape in the openings, but that they all show a certain unity
+and harmony of space division.
+
+The openings are cut with a penknife, care being taken to make as
+clean a cut as possible. Japanese paper, of pale green, orange, or
+some suitable light colour, is pasted under the openings. The process
+of pasting is one that requires some care. It is well to paste only a
+portion of the pasteboard at a time taking care not to use more paste
+than necessary and not to let any get over the edges of the openings.
+The paper should be pressed on while the paste is still moist, and the
+paper itself should, of course, not be pasted at all. It should be
+placed with colour side next to the openings.
+
+When the paste is dry the card-board should be lightly scored on the
+lines AE, BF, etc., and bent on these lines, bringing the sectors
+together into the form of the shade and fastening them at the top and
+bottom temporarily with a bit of passe-partout binding. If the binding
+is of the ordinary width (7/8 of an inch), it should be cut lengthwise
+into two strips of equal width, to be used for mounting the edges. No
+attempt should be made to run the binding along more than one edge. The
+separated strips should then be cut the exact length for each top and
+bottom edge and applied one at a time. Then the side edges are bound,
+with the apex of the angle at the middle of the binding. When the
+binding is firmly fastened it is carefully trimmed off at the top and
+bottom.
+
+
+ELECTRIC LIGHT PENDANTS
+
+[Illustration: A seven-light fixture]
+
+Two designs for such pendants are illustrated in the accompanying
+drawings. They were derived from suggestions in the _Craftsman_, and
+were successfully worked out in remodelling a house. The seven-light
+fixture consists of a circular pendant-board about 30 inches in
+diameter, made from 2-inch plain oak stock, cut into 60-degree segments
+and, with splined joints, glued up to form a circular piece which was
+turned up on a large lathe. An open space 7 inches in diameter was left
+in the larger circle, which was covered by a cup-shaped cap turned
+from plain oak stock and attached to the larger circle by screws. The
+considerable opening covered by this cap contained the cut out and
+the wiring necessary for connecting with each of the seven lights.
+Seven medium-sized hooks of composition metal were procured which had
+large, coarse threaded screws. A 3/16-inch hole was drilled lengthwise
+through the shanks of these hooks. Holes were bored near the centre of
+the arc of each segment in the board circle to receive these hooks.
+When the fixture was assembled the wires for each light were carried
+from the cut out across a channel made for that purpose on the upper
+surface of the board, passed down through the hole in the shank of
+the hook, woven into the links of the chain pendant and connected with
+the corresponding bulb socket after passing through another hook, like
+those described above, which linked the socket to the chain. As a
+finish around the hooks shallow cups of beaten copper were fashioned
+over a wooden form, turned for the purpose, and oxidized to a tone
+somewhat darker than the brown of the oak board. Copper cups in a
+conventional petal design were made to place over each of the bulbs.
+The chains were also oxidized to conform with the other metal work. The
+entire combination was satisfactory.
+
+[Illustration: A five-light fixture]
+
+Another design for the dining-room of the same house and much easier to
+construct is also illustrated. It will be observed that the square form
+instead of the circle is carried out consistently in the woodwork and
+metal caps. These caps and the chains are in natural brass of a dull
+finish. The shades are of ground glass, decorated with a flower design
+in heavy black lines. The central light has a larger shade than the
+others, wholly enclosed. In this one is placed a red incandescent bulb
+for use whenever such decorative effect is desired.
+
+
+DECORATIVE FORGINGS
+
+In the story of the designing and building of the model house reference
+was made to contributions from the forge shop. Among these were the
+andirons, door knocker, lantern bracket, and other articles shown in
+the accompanying illustrations.
+
+It should be understood that all wrought iron work that has any reality
+in it requires an equipment especially adapted to its production. There
+must be a good forge and fire, an anvil, and proper tools, all in the
+hands of a workman of some experience and skill. Successful forge
+work can hardly be considered among the handicrafts easily adapted
+to the needs of the amateur working without instruction and with
+poor equipment. But with good tools, proper equipment, and a little
+experience any clever boy will be able to design and fashion many
+useful articles for the home which have real artistic merit.
+
+[Illustration: Decorative Forgings. Plate XVI]
+
+For the fireplace, in addition to andirons, there may be made the
+shovel, poker, and tongs, and possibly the old-fashioned crane and pot
+hooks. Other fixtures that may be made are ceiling hooks, lantern
+brackets for the wall or for lantern posts, standards for the newel
+post, the hall lantern or the porch lantern, the latch and the knocker
+for the door, and, if the architectural design permits, hinges, plates,
+and bolts for the door. This list by no means exhausts the uses of
+wrought iron in house decoration. It may be extended to include
+draw pulls, key escutcheons, furniture handles and hinges of great
+variety, nails with ornamental heads for use with heavy construction,
+and many small articles such as trivets for steam kettles, toasting
+forks, candle holders, and many other useful articles which have also
+decorative value.
+
+
+
+
+XII
+
+CONCLUDING SUGGESTIONS
+
+COUNTRY HOMES
+
+ To know what you prefer, instead of humbly saying amen to what the
+ world tells you you ought to prefer, is to have kept your soul
+ alive.--_Robert Louis Stevenson_
+
+
+Keen observers of American customs, who have studied the development
+of our taste in house designing and furnishing, tell us that the
+best expression of our art in architecture and home decoration is to
+be found in our country homes. They do not overlook, of course, a
+beautiful public building in this city or that, perhaps ten altogether,
+or an occasional private residence on Millionaire Avenue, which are
+monuments to the genius of the men who created them and of which any
+country may be proud. What they mean is that as a people we seek and
+secure the right combination of utility and beauty in our homes more
+frequently in the country than in the city.
+
+At first thought such a criticism may seem to be an exaggeration.
+Is it reasonable, we ask, that people of good sense, such as most
+Americans are, really succeed better in planning, building, and
+decorating the houses which they are to occupy but a few weeks in the
+summer than they do in developing their city homes? We are told that it
+is true and that there are good reasons for it.
+
+_Simplicity of Country Life._--It is the life in the country and at the
+seashore that is the simple life, the natural life, the life that sets
+us free from the accumulated burden of mere "things." Here we come to
+forget for a time the many and find pleasure in the few. Here we are
+to feel the joy of living. Nature is all about us, and she gives of
+her bounty freely. Our wants are few because we are so well satisfied
+with the free gifts. What wants we have keep step with our needs here
+as they do nowhere else. We care less for what others have; we are more
+individual, more rational. Here we generally demand what we really
+need and we more frequently obtain it. And this is true whether it be
+something that appeals to the æsthetic side of our natures or whether
+it be that which ministers to our material needs. In seeking the
+beautiful for the simple home in the country we do not so often forget
+the useful; for here, away from the world of museums and studios
+and collections, we learn that art is possible without paintings and
+statuary. In the exterior form and colouring of the shingled cottage,
+set like a gem on the hillside or by the sea, in the harmonious
+arrangement of its interiors, with every article of furniture chosen
+only for use and comfort and placed where needed, and with decorations,
+cheerful but restrained and subordinate, suggestive of more glorious
+colours and more interesting things in the world without--in such
+surroundings we have beauty and utility combined. Here we have the time
+and the opportunity to realize the truth that all art is one and that
+it may find in the problems of decoration in the country home, if not
+its highest mission, its most open field for giving to appreciative
+people the pleasure of seeing and enjoying the beautiful.
+
+_Opportunities for Constructive Art._--If it be true that there is a
+more universal recognition of the true principles of art in the better
+class of our country homes than in our city homes, it is proof, if
+proof be needed, that the elements of art expression are found in the
+simple, natural materials of every-day life. It may be that in the
+development of art amid simple surroundings "necessity is the mother
+of invention," and that, more or less naturally, simplicity is thrust
+upon us. The general habit of our time is to extend the vacation
+period in the country or at the seashore to the point of making a home
+there for every summer season. But only a few can carry wealth and
+elegance with them. A great majority must be satisfied with simple and
+inexpensive homes. At first we accept them as the only thing possible,
+and then we discover that in their very simplicity they offer the best
+of opportunities for true æsthetic expression. And this opportunity
+is largely for the younger members of the family--for the boys and
+girls whose vacation period is more extended, whose interest in the
+summer home is perhaps the more vital and whose imagination is the
+more susceptible to the art suggestions of nature. We have seen that
+it is possible for boys and girls to build and furnish a house under
+the exacting requirements of city life. How much easier it must be to
+build a cottage for the summer season, decorating and furnishing it in
+harmony with the simple needs of a vacation home.
+
+If such a suggestion meet with acceptance, those who undertake the
+work will find much practical help in the problems outlined in the
+foregoing chapters. It is not expected, of course, that the directions
+there given will always be exactly followed. In the furniture problems,
+for example, soft woods like pine and spruce may be substituted for
+the harder woods specified. Very attractive as well as very useful
+simple furniture has been made in this way at a merely nominal
+expense. Staining and finishing may easily bring it into harmony with
+colour schemes; but the bright, fresh colour of new pine and spruce
+is in itself by no means unattractive. The smooth, exposed beams
+of the ceilings and walls, if of well chosen stock, may be stained
+a beautiful gray green or a soft brown. A good colour suggestion
+may be found in the weathered gray of the hewn timbers of very old
+buildings. The effect of a ceiled-up wall or of a dado may be easily
+obtained by stretching burlap or denim over the studding or over a
+backing of inexpensive sheathing. These materials are very durable and
+inexpensive, and they may be found in a great variety of beautiful
+shades. They make excellent portières. A lighter, thinner material like
+scrim is better for window draperies. All these fabrics afford good
+surfaces for decoration by stencilling. Stained or painted soft wood
+floors, covered with grass cloth rugs or the more dainty hand woven
+rugs like those described in the chapter on weaving, with simple,
+useful furniture, a picture or two, and a few choice pieces of pottery,
+complete the equipment for a charming living room. If it all be the
+product of home industry, the cash outlay for the material need not
+be over forty dollars, though an outlay of ten times that amount for
+better materials would not in the least interfere with such a room
+being decorated and furnished by the unaided labours of the amateur
+artists and craftsmen of the family.
+
+[Illustration: A fireplace in field rock]
+
+The chief expense would naturally be for the living room, dining-room,
+and kitchen. The dining-room, however, may well be simply a corner or
+alcove of a large living room. Such an arrangement greatly increases
+the value of a single fireplace, which will be required to give the
+summer home the sense of perfect comfort. This may be of rough field
+rock and should be large enough to take one-cut fireplace wood. The
+chamber furnishings may be very simple indeed. Furniture dealers make
+a point of supplying beds, bureaus, chairs, and cabinets of simple
+design, unfinished, so that the purchaser may stain them to harmonize
+with any desired colour scheme. But such furniture, or good substitutes
+for it, can be made very inexpensively. For example, the stock for
+a good bed will not cost over seventy-five cents. Cases provided
+with shelves and curtains in place of drawers, made at a cash outlay
+possibly of one dollar, will serve for bureaus. The cost of materials
+for building an eight-room cottage in every way satisfactory need not
+exceed five hundred dollars; and such a cottage could be beautifully
+furnished by clever boys and girls at an expense for materials of one
+hundred and fifty or perhaps two hundred dollars.
+
+[Illustration: An inexpensive bed]
+
+In the exterior finishing of summer cottages nature generally needs
+very little assistance. No colours harmonize so well with the gray
+rocks, sere fields and marshes, and the evergreen trees by the
+seashore, as the weathered grays of the shingled cottage. The window
+frames, door frames and facings, painted to preserve them, may be
+of the same colour or in dull green or brown, plainly marking the
+outlines of the house but without unpleasant contrasts. A stained roof
+in slate gray or creosote brown is also in keeping. The underpinning
+and outside chimneys in the field rock of the locality are eminently
+fitting. The house among the hills will stand more colour because the
+colours of nature are richer, especially in the autumn season. But
+wherever the house may be, it should repeat in its larger surfaces the
+prevailing colour tones of its natural setting. It should seem to fit
+into its surroundings as if it belonged there and would always remain
+there, a part of the simple, natural beauty all around it.
+
+[Illustration: A country house]
+
+
+THE COUNTRY LIFE PRESS, GARDEN CITY, N. Y.
+
+[Transcriber's Notes:
+ Spelling is the same mix of US/UK as others in series (eg color/colour)
+ Corrected obvious typos:
+ tell -> tells
+ arrrangement -> arrangement
+ CROHETED -> CROCHETED
+ STENCILING -> STENCILLING
+ on account -> on account of
+ will be be -> will be
+ retain -> and retains
+ expecially -> especially
+ Portières/Portieres found with and w/o accent in equal parts
+ (left as in text in each case)
+ Hyphenation made consistent:
+ wood-work -> woodwork
+ outdoor -> out-door
+]
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Library of Work and Play: Home
+Decoration, by Charles Franklin Warner
+
+*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK 44750 ***